JP2022051932A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suppressing trouble of an arrangement work of light emission means.

SOLUTION: A game machine is configured such that plural LEDs 651 (in this embodiment, 8 LEDs) are mounted on a board member 652 which is formed so as to be elastically deformed freely, so that the single board member 652 (radiation unit 650) is arranged (attached) to a front face base 612 (base member 610), and therefore an arrangement work of the plural (8) LEDs 651 can be completed at once. Therefore, trouble of the arrangement work of the LEDs 651 can be suppressed. In addition, holding pins of a back face base are inserted into insertion holes 653b1, 654b1 of respective blocks 653, 654, so that a direction of the radiation faces of the LEDs 651 can be regulated, and therefore the radiation faces of the plural LEDs 651 do not have to be adjusted individually. When assembling the LEDs, in this aspect, trouble of the arrangement work (attachment work) of the LEDs 651 can be suppressed.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 44

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine provided with a target member to be irradiated with light and a plurality of light emitting means arranged in such a posture that each of the target member faces an irradiation surface (a game machine). Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2015-29735

However, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that it takes a lot of time and effort to arrange the light emitting means.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the labor of arranging the light emitting means.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is a plurality of target members to be irradiated with light and a plurality of game machines distributed around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface is directed toward the target member. The light emitting means is provided, and one or a plurality of substrate members formed to be elastically deformable together with at least two or more light emitting means among the plurality of light emitting means, and the substrate member are elastically formed. It is provided with a base member that is held in a deformed predetermined posture.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 includes, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, a block body which is formed to have higher rigidity than the substrate member and is disposed on the substrate member, and the block body is the base member. Is held in.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the light emitting means is arranged in a region of the substrate member where the block body is arranged.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the labor of arranging the light emitting means can be suppressed.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be directed in an appropriate direction.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 2, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be directed in an appropriate direction.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a rear view of the displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of the left displacement member and the right displacement member. It is a rear perspective view of the left displacement member and the right displacement member. It is a front perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 1st aspect. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 1st aspect. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 21. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 1st aspect. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 23. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 2nd aspect. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 25. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 3rd aspect. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 27. It is a front view of a projection unit. It is a rear view of a projection unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a projection unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a projection unit. It is a front view of the rear base. It is a rear view of the front base and the irradiation unit. It is a rear view of the front base. FIG. 34 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front base and the irradiation unit in the direction of arrow XXXVI in FIG. 34. It is a front view of the projection plate member, the gear member, and the groove forming member. FIG. 37 is a partial cross-sectional view of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member in the line XXXVIII-XXXVIII of FIG. 37. (A) is a rear view of the projection unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the projection unit in the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 39 (a). (A) to (c) are partially enlarged sectional views of a projection unit. (A) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (A) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (A) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (A) is a top view of the irradiation unit, and (b) is a front view of the irradiation unit in the direction of arrow XLIVb in FIG. 44 (a). (A) is a rear view of the irradiation unit in the direction of arrow XLVa of FIG. 44 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the irradiation unit in the line XLVb-XLVb of FIG. 44 (b). (A) is a front view of the first block, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first block in the XLVIb-XLVIb line of FIG. 46 (a), and (c) is a front view of the second block. (D) is a cross-sectional view of the second block in the XLVId-XLVId line of FIG. 46 (c). It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in the 1st position. It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in an intermediate position. It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in the 2nd position. It is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in the 1st position. It is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in an intermediate position. It is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in the 2nd position. (A) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connecting member in the first position, (b) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connecting member in the intermediate position, and (c) is a transmission in the second position. It is a rear view of a gear and a connecting member. (A) to (c) are rear views of the transmission gear and the connecting member in the first drive range. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit in the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 54, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 55, and (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view. , FIG. 56 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit in the LIXc-LIXc line of FIG. (A) is a front view of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member in the second embodiment, and (b) is a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove in the LXb-LXb line of FIG. 60 (a). It is sectional drawing of the forming member. It is sectional drawing of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member. It is sectional drawing of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member. It is sectional drawing of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member. (A) is a front view of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member in a third embodiment, and (b) is a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove in the LXIVb-LXIVb line of FIG. 64 (a). It is sectional drawing of the forming member. (A) is a side view of a projection plate member, a gear member and a groove forming member in the direction of arrow LXVa of FIG. 64 (a), and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the member, the gear member and the groove forming member, and (c) is the sectional view of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member in the LXVc-LXVc line of FIG. 65 (a). (A) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (A) is a top view of the irradiation unit according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the irradiation unit. (A) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit in the vicinity of the first block, and (b) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit in the vicinity of the second block. It is a front view of the projection unit in 5th Embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of a projection unit. It is a rear view of the front base. It is a rear view of a projection unit. (A) is a front view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a front view of the projection unit in the second state. (A) is a rear view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a rear view of the projection unit in the second state. (A) is a front view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a front view of the projection unit in the third state. (A) is a rear view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a rear view of the projection unit in the second state. It is a front view of the projection unit in the sixth embodiment. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a projection unit. It is a rear view of the front base in the state which the front base and the irradiation unit are assembled. (A) to (c) are rear views of the projection unit.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 59, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 1 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 has an outer frame 2 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 2 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. It is provided with an inner frame 4 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 4 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front door 5 and the lower plate unit 15. 5 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 4 and the lock of the front door 5 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 5c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses 8 is arranged on the back surface side of the front door 5, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 via the glass unit 16.

On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 5c. In the pachinko machine 1, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, in the pachinko machine 1, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 5c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76, 77, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled and configured, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side of. The base plate 60 is made of wood made by laminating thin plate materials, and is formed so that the player cannot see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in the through hole of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 77 in the same manner as the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 76, 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable change jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 1, a lottery is performed when a prize is given to either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high-probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a big hit is increased as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 140. The "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased and the second winning opening 140 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened is changed, which is longer than the normal time. The time is set. When the first electric accessory 140a is in the open state (open state), the second winning opening 140 is compared with the case where the first electric accessory 140a is in the closed state (closed state). The ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize. Therefore, during the probable change or the shortened working hours, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit. The change may be made so that the number of times that the first electric accessory 140a is opened is increased more than in the normal state. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol does not change during the probability change or the time reduction, and the time when the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened and the first electric accessory per hit. At least one of the number of times the 140a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened, and the first electric accessory 140a and the second electric accessory 82 are opened at one time. It may be changed so that only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased as compared with the normal time, without repeating the number of times.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the winning (starting winning) of either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and is the third. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays variable symbols, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of the first through gate 66. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately alternates between the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66. It is a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 1, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is used. It is configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the first electric accessory 140a of the second winning opening 140. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change and the time saving.

It should be noted that the second winning opening during the probability change or the time reduction can be achieved by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 140a per hit to increase the probability of hitting during the probability change or the time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the 140 and the third winning opening, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 140a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board can pass through the balls flowing down the game board. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). ) Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the first through gate 66 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). .. Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second winning opening 140 in which a ball can win is arranged below the front view of the first winning opening 64. When the ball wins in the second winning opening 140, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 (not shown) is turned on due to the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second winning opening 140 may be configured as five.

A first electric accessory 140a is attached to the second winning opening 140. The first electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 140. There is. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140a is displayed. It becomes an open state (enlarged state), and it becomes easy for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 140.

As described above, during the probabilistic change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. The symbol of "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the first electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the first electric accessory 140a is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is easier to win in the second winning opening 140 as compared with the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 140. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 140 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first electric accessory 140a as in the second winning opening 140, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Therefore, toward the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained, and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning opening 140 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is launched toward the second winning opening 140 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the first through gate 66. It is advantageous for the player to open the first electric accessory 140a and aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning a prize in the second winning opening 140.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit for the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 1, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 140 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be a symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64, for example. It may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

In the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82, are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. To. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 1 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device by the MPU 201. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes each drive motor 481,491,661,880.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operating unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 59. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operating unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 200. 7 and 8 are front views of the operating unit 200.

In FIG. 7, the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, the protrusion member 485, and the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 of the displacement unit 400 are displaced to the retracted positions, respectively. The states in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, the projecting member 485, and the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 are respectively displaced to the overhanging positions of the 400 and 400 are illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 300 formed in a box shape, and a displacement unit 400, a projection unit 600, and a vertical displacement unit 800 are respectively in the internal space of the back case 300. It is housed in order.

The rear case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front, and the wall portions 301 and 302 respectively. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. A front-view rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

The displacement unit 400 includes a front view frame-shaped base member 410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, a left displacement member 420L displaceably disposed on the base member 410, and a right displacement member 420R. A retracting position for retracting the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projecting member 485 to the rear side of the projection unit 600, and an opening 301a of the rear case 300 (that is, a third symbol display device). It can be displaced from the overhanging position on the front side of 81) (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the displacement unit 400 is provided with two drive means (first drive motor 481 and second drive motor 491) for driving the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R, and protruding member 485). By selecting the driving means to be driven, it is possible to make the displacement mode of the displacement member different (form a plurality of types of displacement modes). The details of such a structure will be described later.

The projection unit 600 is a front view ring-shaped base member 610 arranged in front of the displacement unit 400, a disk-shaped projection plate member 620 arranged on the inner peripheral side of the base member 610, and projection. A plurality of LEDs 651 for incident light from the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620 are provided. The projection plate member 620 is made of a light-transmitting material, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player, and when light is incident from the LED 651, the incident light is used as a pattern or a pattern. It is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in the form of a pattern. That is, a pattern or a symbol can be highlighted (displayed) on the front surface of the third symbol display device 81.

In this case, the projection unit 600 adopts a structure that enhances the efficiency of incident light emitted from the LED 651 onto the projection plate member 620, and strengthens the light emitted from the front surface of the projection plate member 620 (patterns and patterns). Can be clearly highlighted). Further, a structure that enhances workability when assembling a plurality of LEDs 651 (irradiation unit 650) to the base member 610 is adopted. Details of these structures will be described later.

The vertical displacement unit 800 includes a front base 820 and a rear base 830 arranged at the upper part of the base member 610 of the projection unit 600, and a displacement member 850 whose one end is rotatably supported by both base members 820 and 830. The other end side of the displacement member 850 can be displaced between the retracted position above the opening 301a (that is, the third symbol display device 81) of the rear case 300 and the overhanging position extending to the front side. Yes (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the vertical displacement unit 800 includes an urging spring SP for urging the displacement member 850, and the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elasticity of the urging spring SP at a predetermined position between the retracted position and the overhanging position. By balancing the restoring force, the displacement member 850 is made to perform a reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP around the equilibrium position (predetermined position). The structure is adopted. The details of such a structure will be described later.

Next, the displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 28. 9 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 10 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400.

The displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and a displacement member (left displacement member 420L and right displacement) that is displaceably arranged on the base member 410. The member 420R) and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) driving means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) for applying a driving force to the displacement member are mainly provided, and as described above, the lower drive is provided. When the displacement member is displaced by driving the mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481), when the displacement member is displaced by driving the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), or when the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive) is displaced. When the displacement member is displaced by driving both the motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), the displacement member is formed so as to be able to be displaced in a different manner. Hereinafter, the details of the structure will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 18.

First, the displacement members (left displacement member 420L and right displacement member 420R) will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R, and FIG. 12 is a rear perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the displacement unit 400 includes a left displacement member 420L and a right displacement member 420R formed as displacement members that produce an effect by displacement, and the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are provided with the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. , The left driven member 430L and the right driven member 430R, the bogie member 440, and the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R are connected.

The left displacement member 420L is a long member arranged in a vertical posture, and has a connecting shaft 421 projecting from the back surface, a connecting hole 422 drilled at the upper end, and a slide bored at the lower end. It is provided with a moving groove 423. The connecting shaft 421 is a shaft having a circular cross section, and the connecting hole 431 of the left driven member 430L is rotatably supported. That is, the upper end of the left driven member 430L is rotatably connected to the back surface side of the left displacement member 420L.

The connecting shaft 421 is set to a length dimension in which the tip protrudes from the back surface of the left driven member 430L, and the tip of the protruding connecting shaft 421 is a drive groove 494c (in the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490). (See FIGS. 17 and 18) is slidably inserted. That is, when the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven (rotated), the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c acts on the connecting shaft 421, and the left displacement member 420L is displaced.

The connecting hole 422 is a hole having a circular cross section, and one of the two connecting shafts 441 of the carriage member 440, which will be described later, is rotatably inserted through the connecting shaft 441. That is, the left displacement member 420L is connected in a state where a relative posture change (rotation around the axis of rotation of the connecting hole 422) with respect to the carriage member 440L is allowed.

The sliding groove 423 is a groove extending along the longitudinal direction of the left displacement member 420L, and the drive pin 488b (see FIG. 15) of the lower left rack 488L described later is rotatably and slidably inserted. .. Therefore, in either case where only the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven while the lower left rack 488L is stopped, or vice versa, the posture change (rotation) of the left displacement member 420L with respect to the base member 410. Can be formed.

The left driven member 430L is a member that is driven by the displacement of the left displacement member 420L by being erected between the base member 410 and the left displacement member 420L, and is a connecting hole 431 drilled at one end (upper end). And a sliding pin 432 projecting from the back surface.

The connecting hole 431 is a hole having a circular cross section, and as described above, the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is rotatably inserted. The sliding pin 432 is a pin (rod-shaped body) having a circular cross section, and is rotatably and slidably inserted into the sliding groove 410a formed on the side of the base member 410. Therefore, when the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the left driven member 430L can be driven while changing its relative posture with respect to the left displacement member 420L.

The bogie member 440 rolls on a rolling surface extending along the left-right direction (width direction) in the upper portion (upper middle portion 410f and upper front portion 410 g, see FIGS. 17 and 18) of the base member 410. It is provided with two connecting shafts 441 arranged side by side in parallel and four rolling wheels 442 rotatably supported at both ends of each connecting shaft 441. Therefore, the upper end of the left displacement member 420L is displaced along the left-right direction (width direction) via the bogie member 440 by rolling the rolling wheels 442 of the bogie member 440 on the rolling surface. ..

The rolling surface of the base member 410 is formed as a substantially horizontal flat surface facing the upper side in the vertical direction, and each rolling wheel 442 of the bogie member 440 is placed on the rolling surface. That is, the left displacement member 420 is suspended and supported on the rolling surface of the base member 410 via the bogie member 440.

The upper left rack 450L slides a guide portion extending in the left-right direction (width direction) in the upper portion (upper middle portion 410f and upper front portion 410g, see FIGS. 17 and 18) of the base member 410. It is a long plate-shaped member, and is engraved along the longitudinal direction on the back surface of the upper left rack 450L and two connecting holes 451 through which the two connecting shafts 441 of the bogie member 440 are rotatably inserted. A rack gear 452 is provided.

Here, the right displacement member 420R is formed in a substantially symmetrical shape with respect to the left displacement member 420L, the right driven member 430R with respect to the left driven member 430L, and the upper right rack 450R with respect to the upper left rack 450L. Since the configurations are substantially the same, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

However, the rack gear 452 is engraved in front of the upper right rack 450R. Further, in the upper right rack 450R, the formed portion of the connecting hole 451 is offset to the front side, and the upper right rack 450R is arranged at a position different from that of the upper left rack 450L in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the rack gear 452 of the upper left rack 450L and the rack gear 452 of the upper right rack 450R are arranged to face each other with a predetermined interval. In this case, both rack gears 452 are meshed with pinion gears 459 rotatably supported by the base member 410.

Therefore, with the displacement of the left displacement member 420L, the upper left rack 450L is displaced (sliding) in the left-right direction (width direction, FIG. 19 left-right direction) along the guide portion (not shown) of the base member 410. Since the displacement of the upper left rack 450L is transmitted to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, the right displacement member 420R can be displaced.

In this embodiment, since the number of pinion gears 459 interposed between the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R is an odd number (that is, one), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged. The displacement direction can be the opposite direction (direction in which they are close to each other or separated from each other). However, the number of pinion gears 459 may be an even number, and the displacement directions of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R may be the same.

Next, the lower drive mechanism 480 among the plurality of drive means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16.

13 and 15 are front perspective views of the displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 14 and 16 are rear perspective views of the displacement unit 400. Note that FIGS. 13 and 14 show a state in which the back cover 412 is attached, and FIGS. 15 and 16 show a state in which the back cover 412 is removed. Further, in FIGS. 13 to 16, the raising cover 413 is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 13 to 16, the lower drive mechanism 480 is a drive in which the first drive motor 481, the pinion gear 482 attached to the drive shaft of the first drive motor 481, and the pinion gear 482 are meshed with each other. A gear 483, a drive arm 484 forming a crank mechanism together with the drive gear 483, a protruding member 485 driven by the drive arm 484, a rack gear 486 arranged on the back surface of the protruding member 485, and a rack gear 486 thereof. Mainly includes a gear train (gears 487a to 487e) to which the first gear 487a is meshed with, and a lower left rack 488L and a lower right rack 488R meshed with the gear 487e at the end of the gear train.

The first drive motor 481 is attached to the front surface of the left front cover 411L, and a pinion gear 482 is attached (fixed) to the drive shaft of the first drive motor 481 protruding from the back surface of the left front cover 411L. The cover. The drive gear 483 is rotatably supported on the back surface of the left front cover 411L, and the drive arm 484 is rotatably supported on the front surface of the base member 410.

The drive gear 483 includes an eccentric pin 483a that is eccentric from the center of rotation and projects from the back surface. The drive arm 484 has a shaft support hole 484a through which the support shaft of the base member 410 is rotatably inserted, a linear sliding groove 484b through which the eccentric pin 483a of the drive gear 483 is slidably inserted, and their shafts. It includes a support hole 484a and a drive pin 484c projecting from the front at an end opposite to the side on which the sliding groove 484b is formed.

Therefore, when the drive gear 483 is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction via the pinion gear 482 by the driving force of the first drive motor 481, the sliding groove 484b of the drive arm 484 is rotated from the eccentric pin 483a of the drive gear 483. When one or the other inner wall surface is affected, the drive arm 484 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction with the shaft support hole 484a as the center of rotation, and the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484 is raised or lowered.

The projecting member 485 includes a linear sliding groove 485a through which the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484 is slidably inserted, and is arranged in front of the base member 410 via the slide rail SL. The slide rail SL is a telescopic linear guide mechanism, and is arranged in a vertical posture in which the telescopic direction is along the vertical direction. The slide rail SL is interposed between the base end rails arranged in front of the base member 410, the tip rails arranged on the back surface of the projecting member 485, and the base end rails and the tip rails. It is provided with an intermediate rail that allows the end rail and the tip rail to be displaced relative to each other in the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, when the drive arm 484 is rotated and the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 485a of the projecting member 485 is pushed up or down by the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484, the slide rail SL is expanded and contracted, and the projecting member 485 is used as a base. It is moved up and down in the vertical direction with respect to the member 410.

The rack gear 486 is engraved along the elevating direction of the projecting member 485, and the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) has the front and right front of the base member 410 with the leading gear 487a meshed with the rack gear 486. It is rotatably supported between the back surface of the cover 411R and the back surface of the cover 411R. Therefore, by moving the protruding member 485 up and down, the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) can be rotated by utilizing the linear motion of the rack gear 486.

The lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are long plate-shaped members, and the rack gear 488a is engraved on the side surface along the longitudinal direction thereof, and the drive pin 488b is projected from the front at the end portion in the longitudinal direction. And each. The lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are positioned differently in the vertical direction, and the rack gears 488a face each other in the left-right direction (width direction) between the back surface of the base member 410 and the front surface of the back cover 412. , FIG. 19 left-right direction) and slidably held.

The gear 487e at the end of the gear train is coaxially fixed to the adjacent gear 487d and protrudes to the rear side through the opening 410b formed in the base member 410, whereby the lower left rack 488L and the lower right It is meshed with each rack gear 488a of the rack 488R. Therefore, as described above, when the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) is rotated as the protruding member 485 moves up and down, the rotation of the gear 487a at the end causes the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R to rotate with each other. It can be linearly moved in the opposite direction (direction in which they are close to each other or separated from each other).

The drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are projected to the front side through the linear insertion groove 410c formed in the base member 410, so that the left displacement member 420L is as described above. And rotatably and slidably inserted into the sliding groove 423 of the right displacement member 420R. Therefore, by linearly moving the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R, the lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced.

The extending direction of the insertion groove 410c is formed substantially parallel to the rolling surface on which the rolling wheel 442 of the bogie member 440 rolls. That is, the direction of the linear motion of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R is substantially parallel to the direction of the linear motion of the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R described later.

Next, the upper drive mechanism 490 among the plurality of drive means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18.

FIG. 17 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 18 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit 400. In FIGS. 17 and 18, for ease of understanding, the pinion gear 459 and the upper right rack 450R are shown between the upper intermediate portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g facing each other.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the upper drive mechanism 490 is a drive in which the second drive motor 491, the pinion gear 492 attached to the drive shaft of the second drive motor 491, and the pinion gear 492 are meshed with each other. It mainly includes a gear 493 and a drive arm 494 that forms a crank mechanism together with the drive gear 493.

The base member 410 is formed as a divided structure in which the upper portion (upper side portion formed in the shape of a substantially frame in front view) is superposed on the front side in order of the upper back surface portion 410e, the upper intermediate portion 410f, and the front surface portion 410g. Will be done.

The second drive motor 491 is attached to the front of an upwardly protruding portion of the upper intermediate portion 410f, and a pinion gear is attached to the drive shaft of the second drive motor 491 protruding from the back surface of the overhanging portion. 492 is attached (fixed). The drive gear 493 and the drive arm 494 are rotatably supported on the back surface of the upper intermediate portion 410f.

The drive gear 493 includes an eccentric pin 493a that is eccentric from the center of rotation and is projected from the back surface. The drive arm 494 has a shaft support hole 494a through which the support shaft of the upper intermediate portion 410f is rotatably inserted, a linear sliding groove 494b through which the eccentric pin 493a of the drive gear 493 is slidably inserted, and the like. It is provided with a shaft support hole 494a and a linear drive groove 494c located at an end opposite to the side on which the sliding groove 494b is formed.

Therefore, when the drive gear 493 is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction via the pinion gear 492 by the driving force of the second drive motor 491, the sliding groove 494b of the drive arm 494 is rotated from the eccentric pin 493a of the drive gear 493. When one or the other inner wall surface is affected, the drive arm 494 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction with the shaft support hole 494a as the center of rotation, and the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494 is displaced to the left or right.

As described above, the tip of the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is slidably inserted into the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494. Therefore, by driving the drive arm 494 (rotating around the shaft support hole 494a) and causing the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c displaced to the left and right to act on the connecting shaft 421, the bogie member 440 (rolling wheel 442) is covered. The upper end side of the left displacement member 420L can be displaced to the left or right by rolling along the rolling surface.

In this case, when the left displacement member 420L is displaced left and right and the carriage member 440 (rolling wheel 442) is rolled on the rolling surface, the upper left rack 450L becomes the guide portion of the base member 410 as described above. It is displaced (sliding) in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 19) along the line, and the displacement of the upper left rack 450L is transmitted to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, whereby the right displacement member. The 420R can be displaced. The rolling surface on which the rolling wheel 442 of the bogie member 440 rolls is formed on the upper intermediate portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g.

Next, the operation of the displacement unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 28.

First, both the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) are driven to drive the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R and projecting member 485). The first aspect of displacement will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 24.

19, 21 and 23 are front views of the displacement unit 400 in the first aspect, and FIGS. 20, 22 and 24 are the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIGS. 19, 21 and 23. It is a rear view.

19 and 20 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projecting member 485 are arranged at the retracted positions, and FIGS. 23 and 24 show the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. And corresponds to the state in which the protruding member 485 is arranged at the overhanging position in the first aspect.

As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, in the state of being arranged in the retracted position, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged in the outermost direction (the position where they are most separated from each other in the left-right direction), and are also arranged. The protruding member 485 is arranged at the lowermost position.

When the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven from this state, the states shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 are passed, and then the states shown in FIGS. 23 and 24 are shown. The left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced toward each other in the left-right direction (width direction) and the projecting member 485 is raised until the state (overhanging position in the first aspect). In the overhanging position in the first aspect, the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projecting member 485 are united (a state in which the sides of the three are in close contact with each other).

Specifically, when the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from the state of FIG. 19, the drive arm 484 is rotated, and the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484 is a sliding groove 485a of the protruding member 485. By pushing up the inner wall surface of the above, the projecting member 485 is raised (see FIGS. 13 and 14).

Further, when the projecting member 485 is raised, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are displaced (linear motion) via the rack gear 486, the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) and the rack gear 488a (FIGS. 15 and 15). 16), the drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R act on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 423 of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R, thereby causing the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement. The lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the member 420R is displaced (linear motion) along the insertion groove 410c of the base member 410 in a direction close to each other.

On the other hand, when the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state of FIG. 19, the drive arm 494 is rotated, and the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494 is the connecting shaft of the left displacement member 420L. It acts on 421. As a result, the bogie member 440 is rolled on the rolling surface, and the upper end side (bogie member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced (linear motion) in a direction close to the right displacement member 420R (FIGS. 17 and 17). 18).

Further, when the upper end side (trolley member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, whereby the right displacement member 420R is displaced. The upper end side (carriage member 440) is displaced (linear motion) in a direction close to the left displacement member 420L (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

In the present embodiment, the displacement amount of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 20) is smaller than the displacement amount on the upper end side (the displacement amount on the lower end side). That is, the movable range of the drive pin 488b (extended length of the insertion groove 410c) is shorter than the movable range of the carriage member 440 (extended length of the rolling surface).

In this case, the lower end side and the upper end side of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R start displacement substantially simultaneously from the retracted position (see FIGS. 19 and 20), and the overhanging position (overhanging position) in the first aspect (see FIGS. 19 and 20). The lower drive mechanism 480 and the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven so as to reach (see FIGS. 23 and 24) at substantially the same time. That is, the displacement speed in the left-right direction on the upper end side (trolley member 440) is faster than that on the lower end side (drive pin 488b).

As a result, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced in the left-right direction while rotating their postures, instead of being displaced in parallel in the left-right direction without rotation while maintaining the vertical posture. That is, it is impossible to displace the posture while rotating it in this way in the configuration in which the displacement member is slid along the slide groove by the driving force of the driving means of 1. It was possible for the first time to use the driving means of.

Further, when the displacement speed in the left-right direction of the upper end side (bogie member 440) is different from that of the lower end side (drive pin 488b), the distance between the drive pin 488b and the bogie member 440 is changed. Since the moving groove 423 has an elongated hole shape extending in the vertical direction with a length larger than the diameter of the drive pin 488b, it is possible to absorb a change in the distance between the two. That is, it is not necessary to provide a complicated mechanism, and the sliding groove 423 and the drive pin 488b may be formed to be rotatable and slidable. Therefore, in addition to reducing the product cost, the reliability and durability of the operation are improved. be able to.

From the state shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, when the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven in the opposite directions to those described above, FIGS. 21 and 22 show. After passing through the indicated states, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in the left-right direction (width direction) to the states shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 (retracted positions), and the protruding member 485 is displaced. Is lowered.

Then, only the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) is driven (that is, the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) is maintained in the non-drive state), and the displacement member (left displacement member 420L, A second aspect of displacing the right displacement member 420R and the projecting member 485) will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. In the description of the second aspect, FIGS. 19 and 20 are also referred to as appropriate.

25 is a front view of the displacement unit 400 in the second aspect, and FIG. 26 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIG. 25. Note that FIGS. 25 and 26 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projecting member 485 are arranged at the overhanging positions in the second aspect.

Here, in the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 (state arranged in the retracted position), in the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490, the left displacement member 420L rotates on the upper end side (axis center of the connecting hole 422). It is arranged in a posture that allows it to rotate as a center. That is, it is allowed that the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L slides along the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494.

Therefore, when only the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from this state (states shown in FIGS. 19 and 20), as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the drive pin of the drive arm 484 is shown. When the 484c pushes up the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 485a of the projecting member 485, the projecting member 485 is raised, and the drive pin 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R has the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member. By acting on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 423 of the 420R, the lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R is displaced (linear motion) in a direction close to each other. That is, in the second aspect, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be rotated with the upper end side (the axis of the connecting hole 422) as the center of rotation.

Then, only the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) is driven (that is, the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) is maintained in a non-drive state), and the displacement member (left displacement member 420L and A third aspect of displacing the right displacement member 420R) will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. In the description of the third aspect, FIGS. 19 and 20 are also referred to as appropriate.

27 is a front view of the displacement unit 400 in the third aspect, and FIG. 28 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIG. 27. Note that FIGS. 27 and 28 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged at the overhanging positions in the third aspect.

Here, the sliding groove 423 of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R has an elongated hole shape extending in the vertical direction with a length larger than the diameter of the drive pin 488b, and has a left displacement member 420L and a right displacement. It is permissible for member 420R to be lifted upwards.

Therefore, when only the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 (the state arranged in the retracted position), the drive arm is driven as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28. The inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c of the 494 is acted on the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L, and the upper end side (trolley member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced (linear motion) in a direction close to the right displacement member 420R. In both cases, the displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, so that the upper end side (carriage member 440) of the right displacement member 420R is displaced in a direction closer to the left displacement member 420L. (Linear motion).

That is, in the third aspect, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be rotated with the lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) as the rotation center. Further, in the third aspect, only the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced, and the protruding member 485 can be maintained in the stopped state.

Here, in the conventional gaming machine, a guide means (for example, a guide groove) is extended to the base member 410, and the displacement member is formed so as to be able to be displaced (guided) along the guide means. The displacement mode of the member (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one. Therefore, the effect of the displacement of the displacement member becomes one pattern, and it is difficult to perform the effect that surprises the player. Even if the driving force (driving speed) of the driving means (for example, the driving motor) is changed by varying the strength, the displacement speed of the displacement member only increases or decreases, and the displacement mode (trajectory) remains constant. Therefore, it is difficult to produce a surprising effect of the player.

On the other hand, according to the displacement unit 400 of the present embodiment, the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) are provided, and the drive state thereof is selected (changed). Thereby, the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R, and projecting member 485) can be displaced in three types (first aspect, second aspect, and third aspect). That is, unlike the conventional product in which the displacement mode of the displacement member is limited to one, the effect is not one pattern, and the displacement member can be displaced in at least three displacement modes, so that the displacement mode is switched. As a result, it is possible to create a surprising effect for the player.

In particular, in the first aspect (see FIGS. 19 to 24), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced by parallel movement (linear motion), while the second aspect. And in the third aspect (see FIGS. 19, 25 to 28), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced only by rotation (rotational motion), and the motion form of the displacement is different. Can be made. As a result, the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be made large, and the player can easily perform a surprising effect.

In this case, in the conventional product, there is a product in which the center of rotation remains constant and the displacement mode is different by changing only the rotation direction, but the second mode and the third mode in the present embodiment are , Not only the rotation direction is different in the same rotation center, but the rotation direction is different and the rotation center is also formed differently (in the second aspect, the upper end side is the rotation center, and the third aspect). The lower end side is regarded as the center of rotation), and the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member (left displacement member 420L and right displacement member 420R) can be made large, and it is possible to easily perform a surprising effect of the player.

Further, in the first aspect, the displacement members (left displacement member 420L and right displacement member 420R) are displaced in a form in which rotation and translation (linear motion) are combined, and the direction of such rotation is the third aspect. It is the same direction as the direction of rotation in. Therefore, in the initial stages of the first aspect and the third aspect (see, for example, FIGS. 21 and 27), the player can visually recognize the displacement members so as to be displaced in a close direction, and distinguish between them. Can be difficult to attach. On the other hand, in the first aspect, the projecting member 485 is raised with the displacement of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R in the proximity direction, whereas in the third aspect, the projecting member 485 is stopped. Can be maintained in a state. That is, in the initial stage where the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in a direction close to each other, when the projecting member 485 is raised, the displacement member is displaced to the overhanging position in the first aspect. You can expect the player to do that.

In the displacement unit 400, the bogie member 440, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are respectively arranged (held) on the base member 410 so as to be linearly displaceable, and the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged on the bogie member 440. The upper end side (connecting hole 422) is rotatably connected, and the drive pin 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R is rotatably connected to the lower end side (sliding groove 423) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. It is rotatably and slidably inserted.

As a result, as described above, the structure for causing the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R to perform a linear motion (first aspect) including a rotational component and a rotational motion (second and third aspects). Can be simplified. For example, it is conceivable to provide a curved guide groove and displace the displacement member along the guide groove, but in the case of sliding displacement along such a curved locus, a complicated structure is required (). That is, in the case of a curved locus, not only the mechanism for guiding the member corresponding to the trolley member 440, the member corresponding to the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R in a curved shape, but also each of these members 440, It will be necessary to provide the 488L and 488R with a mechanism that can continuously apply the driving force).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the bogie member 440, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R may be guided in a straight line direction, and therefore the bogie member 440 may be guided by a rolling surface as a flat surface. Since the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R can utilize the rack and pinion mechanism, their structures can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the durability and the reliability of operation.

Further, according to the displacement unit 400, in any of the first aspect, the second aspect and the third aspect, the mechanism for guiding the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R is common, and specifically, One end side (upper end side) of each displacement member 420L, 420R is guided by the bogie member 440 rolling on the rolling surface, and the other end side (lower end side) is the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack. The 488R is guided by sliding (linear motion) between the base member 410 and the back cover 412. That is, it is not necessary to provide different guide mechanisms according to each aspect, and therefore it is not necessary to adopt a structure for switching between different guide mechanisms. As a result, the structure can be simplified, the reliability and durability of the operation can be improved, and the product cost can be reduced.

Next, the projection unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 46.

First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 32. 29 is a front view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 30 is a rear view of the projection unit 600. 31 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the projection unit 600.

As shown in FIGS. 29 to 32, the projection unit 600 includes a front view ring-shaped base member 610, a disk-shaped projection plate member 620 rotatably arranged on the base member 610, and a projection thereof. A plurality of irradiation units 650 arranged so as to surround the outer peripheral side of the plate member 620, a drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 620, and a driving force of the drive motor 661 to be transmitted to the projection plate member 620. It is mainly provided with a gear train (gears 662 to 664) of the above.

The base member 610 includes a ring-shaped back base 611 and an annular front base 612 disposed in front of the back base 611, and is formed between the facing surfaces of the back base 611 and the front base 612. The projection plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664) are housed in the internal space.

In the area inside the inner peripheral edge of the front base 612 in the front view (hereinafter referred to as “display area”), the projection plate member 620 is visible to the player, and the area outside the inner peripheral edge of the front base 612. (That is, the area shielded by the front base 612) (hereinafter, referred to as "outside the display area"), the projection plate member 620 is made invisible to the player.

The projection plate member 620 is made of a light-transmitting material, and the display of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface side is transmitted to the player to visually recognize the projection plate member 620, and the projection plate member 620 is irradiated from the irradiation unit 650. When the light is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in a manner of forming a pattern or a pattern, and is visually recognized by the player. That is, a pattern or a symbol can be highlighted (displayed) on the front surface of the third symbol display device 81.

A gear member 630 and a groove forming member 640 are arranged on the back surface side and the front surface side, respectively, on the outer peripheral edge portion of the projection plate member 620. The gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are formed in an annular shape in the front view and are arranged concentrically with the projection plate member 620.

A plurality of teeth are engraved on the gear member 630 along the outer peripheral surface, and the gear 664 at the end of the gear train is meshed with the gear member 630. The groove forming member 640 is a member for forming a guide groove 641 having a U-shaped cross section continuous in the circumferential direction with the projection plate member 620, and is a plurality of collars rotatably supported by the base member 610. By guiding C to the guide groove 641, the projection plate member 620 is rotatably held by the base member 610. The detailed configuration of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 will be described later.

The irradiation unit 650 is a unit provided with a plurality of light emitting means (LED 651) for incident light from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and each LED 651 faces the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 (opposites the outer peripheral surface). A plurality of (5 in this embodiment) are arranged in the posture. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the extension line of the irradiation direction of each LED 651 is set to pass through the substantially center of the projection plate member 620. The details of the mounting structure of the irradiation unit 650 to the base member 610 will be described later.

The drive motor 661 is arranged on the back surface side of the rear surface base 611, and the gear 662 at the head of the gear train is connected (fixed) to the drive shaft of the drive motor 661. Further, a gear member 630 arranged on the projection plate member 620 is meshed with the gear 664 at the end of the gear train. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the drive motor 661 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the gear member 630 via the gear train (gear 662 to gear 664), and the projection plate member 620 is rotated.

Next, the holding structure of the projection plate member 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 38. FIG. 33 is a front view of the rear base 611. FIG. 34 is a rear view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650, and FIG. 35 is a rear view of the front base 612.

As shown in FIG. 33, the back surface base 611 has an inner standing portion and 611a erected on the inner edge portion of the annular plate member, and an outer standing portion erected on the outer edge portion of the annular plate member. An inner concave groove in a region surrounded by an intermediate standing portion 611b that is erected between the setting portion 611c, the inner standing portion 611a and the outer standing portion 611c, and the inner standing portion 611b and the inner standing portion 611a. Mainly provided with 611d, an outer recess 611e in a region surrounded by the inner standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 611c, and a regulating protrusion 611f projecting from an annular plate member at predetermined intervals. It is formed.

The inner standing portion 611a is erected on the front side (front side of the paper in FIG. 33) from the inner edge portion of the annular plate member, and has a constant thickness in the radial direction.

The outer erection portion 611c is erected on the front side (front side of the paper in FIG. 33) from the outer edge portion of the annular plate member, and has a constant thickness in the radial direction.

The intermediate standing portion 611b is erected at an intermediate position between the inner standing portion 611a and the outer standing portion 611b. Further, the intermediate standing portion 611b is formed by being divided into seven parts around the axis, and each divided end portion is connected to the outer standing portion 611c.

The inner concave groove 611d is a region for arranging the outer edge portion of the projection plate member 620 described later inside, and surrounds the annular plate member, the inner standing portion 611a, and the intermediate standing portion 611b in three directions. Is formed.

The outer concave groove 611e is a region for arranging the irradiation unit 650 described later inside, and is formed by surrounding the annular plate member, the outer standing portion 611c, and the intermediate standing portion 611b in three directions. To.

The regulation protrusion 611f is a protrusion that prevents the collar C pivotally supported by the front base 612 from rattling on the back side, and is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter larger than the inner diameter of the hole opened in the axis of the collar C. At the same time, a protrusion is formed on the front side. In this embodiment, the regulation protrusions 611f are formed at six locations with predetermined intervals.

As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, on the back surface of the front base 612, the inner standing portion 611a, the intermediate standing portion 611b, the outer standing portion 611c, and the regulation protrusion 611f of the back base 611 are supported. The erection portion 612a, the intermediate erection portion 612b, the outer erection portion 612c, and the shaft portion 612f are erected. That is, in the state where the base member 610 is assembled, the standing tip surfaces of the standing portions 612a to 612c of the front base 612 are overlapped with the standing tip surfaces of the standing portions 611a to 611c of the back base 611. At the same time, the tip of the shaft portion 612f is inserted into the regulation protrusion 611f.

A plurality of holding pins 612g are erected in the area on the back surface of the front base 612 between the intermediate standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 612c. The holding pin 612g is an axial state having a circular cross section for positioning and holding the irradiation unit 650, and is arranged at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction.

As described above, the irradiation unit 650 is a unit provided with a plurality of LEDs 651 and for incident the light emitted from each of the LEDs 651 from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, along the periphery of the projection plate member 620. Arranged. That is, the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 is surrounded by a plurality of irradiation units 650.

The irradiation unit 650 is the back surface of the front base 612 and is mounted in the area between the intermediate standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 612c, and the front surface of the back base 611 is superimposed on the back surface of the front base 612. As a result, they are accommodated between the facing surfaces (internal space) of both bases 611 and 612.

FIG. 36 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650 in the direction of arrow XXXVI of FIG. 34.

As shown in FIG. 36, a substantially semicircular cutout portion 612b1 is formed in the intermediate standing portion 612b of the front base 612 on the standing tip side thereof. Similarly, a substantially semicircular notch portion 611b1 is formed at a position in phase with the notch portion 612b1 on the standing tip side of the intermediate standing portion 611b of the back base 611 (FIG. 33). reference).

That is, in a state where the standing tip surfaces of the intermediate standing portions 611b and 612b are overlapped with each other (that is, in the assembled state of the base member 610), the notched portions 611b1 and 612b2 form a substantially circular opening in the front view. To. These circular openings are formed at positions facing each LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 (positions having the same phase).

Therefore, the light emitted from each LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 passes through the circular openings formed by the cutout portions 611b1 and 612b1 of the intermediate standing portions 611b and 612b, and is incident on the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. Will be done. The circular opening is set to a diameter larger than the diameter of the light emitting portion of the LED 651.

Next, the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38.

FIG. 37 is a front view of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. FIG. 38 is a partial cross-sectional view of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 in the line XXXVIII-XXXVIII of FIG. 37. In FIG. 38, the boundary between the above-mentioned display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M.

As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the projection plate member 620 is formed in a circular plate-like body when viewed from the front. The projection plate member 620 includes a notch portion 621 and a reflection portion 622 that diffusely reflects light at a part of the outer edge.

The cutout portion 621 is a portion for facilitating the arrangement of the collar C on the regulation protrusion 611f of the back surface base 611, and is formed by cutting out a part of the outer edge of the projection plate member 620 in a straight line in a direction orthogonal to the radial direction. Will be done.

The reflection portion 622 is a portion where the inside of the projection plate member 620 is roughened by laser processing or the like, and the entire area of the projection plate member 620 in the front view is processed into a shape such as a pattern or a pattern. As a result, when the light incident on the inside of the projection plate member 620 is applied to the reflecting portion 622, it is diffusely reflected by the rough surface of the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the surface side of the game board.

As a result, the player can easily see the diffusely reflected light and can see the shape of the reflecting portion 622. That is, when light is incident on the projection plate member 620, the shape of the reflecting portion 622 can be displayed on the front side of the projection plate member 620.

The gear member 630 is made of a light-transmitting material having a lower refractive index than the projection plate member 620, is formed of an annular plate-like body in front view, and has an outer diameter dimension larger than that of the projection plate member 620. It is set to a large size and is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, is arranged on the back side of the front base 612). Further, the gear member 630 is arranged on the back surface side (the back side of the paper in FIG. 37) of the projection plate member 620, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620.

The gear member 630 is inclined toward the front side from the tooth portion 631 engraved along the outer peripheral surface, the back surface portion 632 on the side surface on the back surface side, and the end portion on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the back surface portion 632. The inclined surface portion 633 is provided.

As described above, the tooth portion 631 is a tooth surface to which the gear 664 is meshed, and is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the gear member 630 over the entire circumference.

The inclined surface portion 633 is a surface that is continuously provided from the end portion 634 on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the back surface portion 632 and is inclined toward the front side. Further, the inclination angle of the inclined surface portion 633 toward the front side is a virtual angle θ1 between the virtual line B connecting the light source A and the end portion 634 of the LED 651 and the back surface portion 632 extending the back surface portion 632 to the inner peripheral side. It is set to be substantially the same as the intersection angle θ2 of the line C and the inclined surface portion 633 (θ1 = θ2).
The groove forming member 640 is made of a light transmissive material having a refractive index lower than that of the projection plate member 620, is formed in an annular shape in front view, and is formed in a shape in which the cross section is bent into a substantially L shape, and the bent inside is formed. It is arranged on the projection plate member 620 side. Further, the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, is arranged on the back side of the front base 612). Further, the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the front side (upper side of FIG. 38) of the projection plate member 620, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620.

The groove forming member 640 has a side surface portion 641a on one surface of the inner portion bent in a substantially L-shaped cross section, a contact surface 641b on the other surface of the inner portion bent in a substantially L-shaped cross section, and a side surface on the front side. A front surface portion 642 and an inclined surface portion 643 inclined from an end portion on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the front surface portion 642 to the back surface side are provided.

The side surface portion 641a is a surface that sandwiches the collar C between the side surfaces of the projection plate member 620 on the front side (upper side of FIG. 38), and has a constant facing distance around the plane and the axis of the projection plate member 620 on the front side. Formed apart.

The contact surface 641b is a surface that abuts on the collar C arranged between the side surface portion 641a and the projection plate member 620 to rotatably hold the projection plate member 620, and its cross section is orthogonal to the side surface portion 641a. At the same time, it is formed in a circular shape around the axis.

Therefore, the side surface portion 641a and the contact surface 641b can be arranged on the projection plate member 620 to form a guide groove 641 for guiding the collar C. That is, the guide groove 641 is formed between the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 by assembling the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640.

The inclined surface portion 643 is a surface that is continuously provided from the end portion 644 on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the front surface portion 642 and is inclined toward the back surface side. Further, the inclination angle of the inclined surface portion 643 toward the back surface is a virtual angle θ3 between the virtual line D connecting the light source A and the end portion 644 of the LED 651 and the front portion 642 extending the front portion 642 to the inner peripheral side. It is set to be substantially the same as the intersection angle θ4 of the line E and the inclined surface portion 643 (θ3 = θ4).

Next, the projection plate member 620 and the color C will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39 (a) is a rear view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 39 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the projection unit 600 in the XXXIXb-XXXIXb line of FIG. 39 (a). 40 (a) to 40 (c) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the projection unit 600. It should be noted that FIGS. 40 (a) to 40 (c) show the transition state when the collar C is attached to the shaft portion 612f of the front base 612. Further, in FIGS. 39 and 40, a state in which the back base 611 is removed from the projection unit 600 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 39 (b), when the collar C is arranged on the shaft portion 612f, the protruding portion C1 projecting radially outward thereof is the front side (FIG. 3) of the projection plate member 620. It is arranged between the side surface of 39 (b) lower side) and the side surface portion 641a of the groove forming member 640 (guide groove 641).

Further, the distance dimension L1 between the tip surface of the protrusion C1 of the collar C and the side surface portion 641a of the groove forming member 640 is from the distance dimension L2 between the shaft portion of the collar C and the outer peripheral surface of the groove forming member 640. Is also set small (L1 <L2).

Therefore, in order to make the projection plate member 620 rotatable, when the groove forming member 640 and the collar C are arranged with a predetermined gap, the projection plate member 620 is arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions by the gap. The contact surface 641b of the groove forming member 640 can be brought into contact with the tip of the protruding portion C1 of the collar C even if the groove forming member 640 is displaced. As a result, the projection plate member 620 can be rotatably held by the tip of the protrusion C1 of the collar C, and the projection plate member 620 can be smoothly rotated.

Next, the attachment of the collar C to the shaft portion 612f of the front base 612 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 (a) to 40 (c).

As shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 40 (a), when the color C is arranged on the shaft portion 612f, the projection plate member 620 is arranged on the front base 612.

Here, the arrangement of the projection plate member 620 on the front base 612 is performed by arranging the groove forming member 640 inside the inner concave groove 612d of the front base 612. That is, the radial distance dimension of the inner concave groove 612d is formed to be larger than the radial distance dimension of the groove forming member 640, and the projection plate is formed by arranging the groove forming member 640 inside the inner concave groove 612d. The member 620 can be positioned and arranged.

Next, the projection plate member 620 is rotated to displace the notch portion 621 of the projection plate member 620 toward the shaft portion 612f on which the collar C is arranged. That is, by aligning the position of the notch portion 621 with the shaft portion 612f, the color C can be arranged on the front base 612 in the state where the projection plate member 620 is arranged.

Next, in the arrangement of the color C on the shaft portion 612f, the axis of the color C is on the back surface side (upper side in FIG. 40 (a)) with respect to the axis of the shaft portion 612f on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 40 (a)). It is done in a state of being inclined to. In this state, the shaft of the collar C is inserted into the tip of the shaft portion 612f, and the protruding portion C1 located inside the projection plate member 620 is inserted into the notch portion 621 and the guide groove 641.

From this state, as shown in FIG. 40 (b), the opposite side is rotated to the front side (lower side in FIG. 40 (b)) with the tip of the protrusion C1 located inside the projection plate member 620 as an axis. Thereby, the axis of the color C can be arranged concentrically with the axis of the shaft portion 612f.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40 (c), by displacing the collar C toward the front side (lower side in FIG. 40 (c)), the tip surface of the protrusion C1 of the collar C and the groove forming member 640 come into contact with each other. It is arranged at a position facing the surface. After that, by rotating the projection plate member 620, the collar C can be arranged inside the guide groove 641.

Here, if a groove is formed on the outer edge of the circular rotating member and a plurality of collars are arranged inside the groove, the rotating member is lifted (operated) in order to arrange the collars. There was a problem that the efficiency of assembly was poor because it was necessary to arrange the collar and both hands were used for the assembly.

On the other hand, in the projection unit 600, since the notch portion 621 is formed in the projection plate member 620, it is necessary to lift (operate) the projection plate member 620 when arranging the collar C as described above. not. Therefore, the efficiency of assembling the projection unit 600 can be improved.

By lining the back base 611 from the back side to the projection unit 600 assembled in this way, the projection unit 600 can be assembled.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43.

41 (a) to 43 (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. In addition, in FIG. 41 (b), FIG. 42 (b) and FIG. 43 (b), the illustration of the cross-sectional line is omitted for ease of understanding.

Further, in FIGS. 41 (b), 42 (b) and 43 (b), the refraction angle when the light from the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 is the present invention. Considering that it does not affect the invention, the light incident on the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is shown in a orthogonal manner. Further, in FIGS. 41 to 43, the boundary between the above-mentioned display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M.

As shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light having an irradiation angle α that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 620 is the outer edge of the projection plate member 620. It is incident from the side surface of the part. The light incident on the projection plate member 620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the side surfaces on the front side and the back side of the projection plate member 620. As a result, the light incident on the projection plate member 620 can travel from the edge side of the projection plate member 620 toward the central portion. Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is diffusely reflected by the reflecting unit 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine (upper side of FIG. 41B).

In this case, when the light traveling inside the projection plate member 620 is applied to the front surface or the back surface of the projection plate member 620 at a position where the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are adjacent to each other. It is conceivable that the amount of light traveling inside the projection plate member 620 is reduced by incident on the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 from the front or back side surface of the projection plate member 620.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 are formed of a light transmitting material having a refractive index lower than the refractive index of the amount of the light transmitting material of the projection plate member 620, the projection plate is formed. The light traveling through the member 620 is also emitted from the front surface or the back surface of the projection plate member 620 at a position where the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are adjacent to each other. It can be totally reflected on the side of the back. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the amount of light incident from the edge portion of the projection plate member 620.

That is, when the light passing through the medium having a high refractive index travels to the medium having a low refractive index, it is totally reflected without being incident on the medium having a low refractive index when the incident angle is increased. In the projection unit 600, the projection plate member 620 is formed in a plate-like body, and light is incident from the end face (edge portion) thereof, so that the incident angle of the light is sufficiently large. Therefore, light is not incident on the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 having a low bending rate from the projection plate member 620, and can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the amount of light traveling on the projection plate member 620.

Similarly, regarding the relationship between the projection plate member 620 and air, since the refractive index of air is a value sufficiently smaller than the amount of the transmissive material (refractive index 1), it proceeds inside the projection plate member 620. The light is not incident on the air (in the atmosphere) from the projection plate member 620, and can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the amount of light traveling on the projection plate member 620.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light having an irradiation angle β that irradiates the groove forming member 640 is incident on the groove forming member 640. Will be done.

The light incident on the groove forming member 640 can be reflected inside the groove forming member 640 and travel toward the axis of the projection plate member 620. In this case, at the position where the side surface of the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other (facing), the light reflected inside the groove forming member 640 can be incident on the projection plate member 620 side. ..

That is, at a position where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, the groove forming member 640 is adjacent to the air (atmosphere), so that the light radiated to the side surface can be reflected. On the other hand, at the position where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other, the light-transmitting material having a refractive index lower than the refractive index of the light-transmitting material amount of the projection plate member 620 is formed, so that the light-transmitting material is irradiated. Light can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

The light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the groove forming member 640 can be totally reflected by the inner side surface of the projection plate member 620 and proceed in the same manner as the light having an irradiation angle α. Since the reason is the same as in the case of the irradiation angle α, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle β can also pass through the projection plate member 620, be diffusely reflected by the reflecting unit 622, and be emitted to the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to increase the intensity (light amount) of the light emitted from the projection plate member 620 without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 620 or increasing the light intensity (light amount) of the LED 651 to irradiate. can.

That is, not only the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 is incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, but also the light emitted to the groove forming member 640 is incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, it is possible to improve the light collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, among the light emitted from the light source A, the light that reaches the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 620 can be increased, so that the light that is reflected by the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 is emitted. The amount of light can be increased to make patterns and patterns stand out (display) clearly. Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the LED 651, the amount of heat generated can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and devices can be suppressed.

Further, since the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612), it can be difficult for the player to see, and the appearance can be improved accordingly. It can be suppressed from getting worse.

Here, the light incident on the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is such that the groove forming member 640 is in front of the light source A in the front direction (on FIG. 42 (a)) as compared with the light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the light source A described above. The incident angle of the light when irradiating the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640 becomes smaller because the position is shifted in the direction). This makes it difficult to totally reflect the light traveling inside the groove forming member 640 on the inner side surface thereof, but at least a part of the light incident on the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is reflected. The above-mentioned state (a state in which light is reflected by the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640) can be formed.

Further, since the groove forming member 640 includes the inclined surface portion 643, the amount of light that is irradiated to the irradiation angle β and reflected on the projection plate member 620 side can be increased. That is, as described above, the inclined surface portion 643 is formed so that the intersection angle θ4 is the same as the intersection angle θ3 between the virtual line D connecting the light source A and the end portion 644 of the LED 651 and the front portion 642 (FIG. 38). (See), so after reflecting the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) toward the end portion 644, the light can be made to travel along the inclined surface portion 643, and the light having an irradiation angle β can be emitted from the projection plate member. The area reflected on the 620 side can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected on the projection plate member 620 side can be increased.

Further, since the outer diameter of the groove forming member 640 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620, the irradiation angle β from the light source A can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be easily reflected by the outer edge portion of the groove forming member 640 to be easily incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the light collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be improved accordingly.

As shown in FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light having an irradiation angle γ that irradiates the gear member 630 is incident on the gear member 630.

The light incident on the gear member 630 is reflected inside the gear member 630 and is advanced toward the axis of the projection plate member 620. In this case, at the position where the side surface of the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other (face), the light reflected from the inside of the gear member 630 can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

That is, at a position where the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, the gear member 630 is adjacent to the air (in contact with the atmosphere), so that the light emitted to the inner side surface of the gear member 630 is reflected. be able to. On the other hand, at the position where the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other, the gear member 630 is formed of a light-transmitting material having a refractive index lower than the refractive index of the light-transmitting material of the projection plate member 620. The emitted light can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

The light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the gear member 630 is totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620 and is advanced toward the axial center side of the projection plate member 620, similarly to the light at the irradiation angle α. The reason is the same as in the case of the irradiation angle α, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle γ passes through the projection plate member 620, is diffusely reflected by the reflecting unit 622, and is emitted to the front side of the game machine. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 620 or increasing the amount of light (light amount) of the LED 651 to irradiate.

That is, the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 can be incident not only on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, but also the light emitted on the gear member 630 can be incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. By that amount, the light collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be improved. Therefore, among the light emitted from the light source A, the light that reaches the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 620 can be increased, so that the amount of light that is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is emitted. Can be increased to make patterns and patterns stand out (display) clearly. Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the LED 651, the amount of heat generated can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and devices can be suppressed.

Further, since the gear member 630 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612), it can be difficult for the player to see, and the appearance is deteriorated accordingly. Can be suppressed.

Further, the light incident on the gear member 630 from the light source A is such that the gear member 630 is in the back direction with the light source A (downward in FIG. 43 (a)) as compared with the light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the light source A described above. The incident angle when irradiating the inner side surface of the gear member 630 is reduced by the amount that the position is displaced. This makes it difficult to totally reflect the light traveling inside the gear member 630 on the side surface thereof, but at least a part of the light incident on the gear member 630 from the light source A is reflected and the above-mentioned state. (A state in which light is reflected by the inner side surface of the gear member 630) can be formed.

Since the gear member 630 includes the inclined surface portion 633, the amount of light that is irradiated to the irradiation angle γ and reflected on the projection plate member 620 side can be increased. That is, as described above, the inclined surface portion 633 is formed so that the intersection angle θ2 is the same as the intersection angle θ1 between the virtual line B connecting the light source A and the end portion 634 of the LED 651 and the back surface portion 632 (FIG. 38). (See), so after reflecting the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) toward the end 634, the light can be made to travel along the inclined surface portion 633, and the light emitted to the irradiation angle γ can be emitted. The area reflected on the projection plate member 620 side can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected on the projection plate member 620 side can be increased.

Further, since the outer diameter of the gear member 630 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620, the irradiation angle β from the light source A can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be reflected by the outer edge portion of the gear member 630 to be easily incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the light collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be improved accordingly.

Next, the detailed configuration of the irradiation unit 650 and the attachment structure to the base member 610 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46.

44 (a) is a top view of the irradiation unit 650, and FIG. 44 (b) is a front view of the irradiation unit 650 in the direction of the arrow XLIVb of FIG. 44 (a). 45 (a) is a rear view of the irradiation unit 650 in the direction of arrow XLVa of FIG. 44 (a), and FIG. 45 (b) is an irradiation unit 650 in the XLVb-XLVb line of FIG. 44 (b). It is a cross-sectional view of. Note that FIGS. 44 and 45 show a state before being attached to the base member 610 (front base 612) (that is, a state in which the substrate member 652 is not elastically deformed).

As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the irradiation unit 650 is provided on a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) LEDs 651, a substrate member 652 on which the plurality of LEDs 651 are mounted on the front surface, and a back surface of the substrate member 652. A plurality of (two in this embodiment) first block 653 and second block 654 are provided.

The substrate member 652 is formed of an elastically deformable material in a horizontally long strip shape when viewed from the front. As described above, the LED 651 is a light emitting means for irradiating light for incident from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and a plurality of LEDs 651 are in a posture in which the irradiation surface is directed to the front surface of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652. They are arranged at equal intervals along (FIG. 44 (b) left-right direction).

The first block 653 and the second block 654 are members interposed between the substrate member 652 and the base member 610, and two first blocks 653 are arranged on the longitudinal center side of the substrate member 652. At the same time, the second block 654 is arranged on both sides of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction with the first block 653 interposed therebetween.

The first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape from a resin material, and have higher rigidity (characteristics that are less likely to be elastically deformed) than the substrate member 652. Therefore, in the state of being attached to the base member 610 (front base 612), only the portion of the substrate member 652 located between the adjacent blocks 653 and 654 can be elastically deformed. Here, the first block 653 and the second block 654 will be described with reference to FIG. 46.

46 (a) is a front view of the first block 653, and FIG. 46 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first block 653 in the XLVIb-XLVIb line of FIG. 46 (a). Further, FIG. 46 (c) is a front view of the second block 654, and FIG. 46 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the second block 654 in the XLVId-XLVId line of FIG. 46 (c).

The first block 653 has a front side (paper surface of FIG. 46 (a)) from a bottom wall portion 653a having a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view and a side wall portion 653b erected from four sides of the bottom wall portion 653a toward the front side. The front side) is formed in an open box shape.

Of the four side wall portions 653b, the opposite side wall portion 653b (standing from the short side of the bottom wall portion 653a) has a fastening hole h recessed in the front end surface thereof, and the screw S1 can be fastened. It is said that. Further, the side wall portions 653b different from the side wall portion 653b in which the fastening hole h is recessed are connected to each other by the connecting wall 653c, and the protrusion 653c1 is projected from the front end surface of the connecting wall 653c.

The second block 654 is located on the front side (front of the paper surface in FIG. 46 (c)) from the bottom wall portion 654a having a rectangular front view and the side wall portion 654b erected from the four sides of the bottom wall portion 654a toward the front side. The side) is formed in an open box shape. A rectangular opening 654a1 in front view is formed in the bottom wall portion 654a so that an electrical connection line can be inserted through the bottom wall portion 654a.

Of the four side wall portions 654b, the side wall portion 654b erected from the short side of the bottom wall portion 654a is provided with a fastening hole h on the front end surface thereof so that the screw S1 can be fastened. Further, the side wall portions 653b erected from the long side of the bottom wall portion 654a are connected to each other by the connecting wall 654c, and the connecting wall 654c is provided with a fastening hole h on the front end surface thereof, and the screw S1 is provided. Can be fastened.

In the first block 653 and the second block 654, insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 are bored at two locations of the side wall portions 653b and 654b which are erected from the long sides of the bottom wall portions 653a and 654a (FIG. 45). (A) and FIG. 46 (b)). The holding pin 612g of the front base 612 is inserted into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1. As a result, it is possible to position the arrangement positions of both blocks 653 and 654 with respect to the front base 612 and hold them at the arrangement positions.

The first block 653 is symmetrical with respect to the first virtual plane (that is, the virtual plane including the axes of the two fastening holes h) passing through the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46A). In addition, it is formed in a shape that passes through the center in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 46A) and is symmetrical with respect to the second virtual plane that is perpendicular to the first virtual plane.

Therefore, in the irradiation unit 650 in which the first block 653 of 2 is arranged with respect to the substrate member 620 of 1, the first block 653 can be shared, so that the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. Can be done. Further, when the first block 653 is assembled to the substrate member 620, the first block 653 has neither the vertical direction nor the longitudinal direction with respect to the substrate member 620, so that the workability at the time of assembling work is improved. Can be planned.

Similarly, the second block 654 is relative to the first virtual plane (that is, the virtual plane including the axes of the two fastening holes h) passing through the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46 (c)). It is formed in a symmetrical shape.

Therefore, in the irradiation unit 650 in which the second block 654 of the second is arranged with respect to the substrate member 620 of one, the second block 654 can be shared, so that the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. Can be done. Further, when assembling the second block 654 to the substrate member 620, the second block 654 does not have a vertical direction with respect to the substrate member 620, so that the workability at the time of assembling work is improved. Can be done.

It will be described back to FIG. 44 and FIG. 45. The first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back surface side of the substrate member 652 with their longitudinal directions along the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 and a predetermined distance from the adjacent ones. To.

Specifically, in the first block 653 and the second block 654, the front surface thereof is overlapped with the back surface of the substrate member 652, and the screw S1 inserted from the insertion hole formed in the substrate member 652 is screwed into the fastening hole h. By doing so, it is fastened and fixed to the back surface side of the substrate member 652. In this case, the protrusion 653c1 of the first block 653 is projected to the front side from the insertion hole formed in the substrate member 652.

Only the LED 651 is arranged (mounted) on the front surface of the board member 652, and other electronic components and connectors are arranged (mounted) on the back surface of the board member 652. In this case, as described above, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed in a box shape with an open front surface, and the opened side thereof is arranged so as to overlap the back surface of the substrate member 652. That is, since both blocks 652 and 654 have a recess on the surface on the side to be overlapped (arranged) on the substrate member 652, the electronic component or connector mounted on the substrate member 652 is provided in the recess (internal space). Can be accommodated. Therefore, since the electronic components and the connector can be covered and protected by both blocks 653 and 654, it is possible to prevent the electronic components and the connector from being damaged by the contact with the surrounding displaced members (for example, the projection plate member 620). can.

Further, the circuit (pattern) formed on the substrate member 652 is formed on the back surface thereof. Therefore, such a circuit can also be covered and protected by both blocks 653, 654, so that it is possible to prevent the circuit from being damaged (broken) due to contact with a surrounding displaced member (for example, a projection plate member 620). can. Further, the portion of the substrate member 652 where both blocks 652 and 654 are not arranged is elastically deformed (bent) into a curved shape that is convex toward the back surface (see FIG. 34), so that the circuit is projected accordingly. It can be separated from the plate member 620. As a result, it is possible to prevent the circuit from being damaged (disconnected) even in the portion where both blocks 652 and 654 are not arranged.

A method of arranging (assembling method) the irradiation unit 650 configured in this way on the base member 610 will be described. First, the irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the back surface of the front base 612 in the area between the intermediate standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 612c. In this case, while elastically deforming (bending) the substrate member 652, each holding pin 612g erected from the back surface of the front base 612 is inserted into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654. ..

As a result, both blocks 653, 654 (that is, the irradiation unit 650) can be held on the back surface of the front base 612, and the arrangement position of the irradiation unit 650 (that is, the irradiation direction of the LED 651) can be positioned at a predetermined position (FIG. 34). reference). After that, by superimposing the front surface of the back surface base 611 on the back surface of the front surface base 612, the irradiation unit 650 is accommodated between the facing surfaces (internal space) of both bases 611 and 612. That is, the irradiation unit 650 is arranged (assembled) on the base member 610.

In the present embodiment, in the state where the irradiation unit 650 is arranged on the base member 610, the LEDs 651 are arranged on the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction as described above. That is, not only the circumferential distance of the LED 651 in one irradiation unit 650, but also the circumferential distance of the LED 651 between the one irradiation unit 650 and the irradiation unit 650 adjacent to the one irradiation unit 650 is the same as the other. Will be done.

Here, the projection unit 600 causes the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 651 to be incident on the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, it is necessary to dispose a plurality of LEDs 651 along the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. In addition to the large number of such LEDs 651 arranged (attached), each LED 651 is arranged by adjusting the irradiation surface (irradiation direction) of each LED 651 to a posture toward the center of the projection plate member 620. It is necessary to do this, which increases the labor of the arrangement work.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since a plurality of (8 in this embodiment) LEDs 651 are mounted on the substrate member 652 formed so as to be elastically deformable, one substrate member 652 (irradiation unit 650). Is arranged (attached) to the front base 612 (base member 610), so that the arrangement work of a plurality of (8 in this embodiment) LEDs 651 can be completed at one time (see FIG. 34). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the labor of disposing the LED 651 by that amount.

Further, by inserting the holding pin 612g of the back base 612 into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654, the substrate member 652 can be held in a predetermined elastically deformed posture, and the LED 651 can be held. The direction of the irradiation surface can be specified (see FIG. 34). That is, it is not necessary to assemble a plurality of LEDs 651 to the rear base 612 while adjusting their irradiation surfaces individually, and each LED 651 can be inserted only by inserting the holding pins 612g into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of both blocks 653 and 654. Since the posture (irradiation direction) of the LED 651 can be set (adjusted), the labor of disposing (attaching) the LED 651 can be suppressed from this point as well.

In this case, the irradiation unit 650 includes a first block 653 and a second block 654 that are formed to have higher rigidity than the substrate member 652, and since both blocks 653 and 654 are held by the back surface base 612, vibration and the like occur. It is possible to easily define the posture of the substrate member 652 as a desired posture by suppressing the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 due to the external force input or by correcting the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 itself. As a result, the posture of each LED 651 can be suppressed from being affected by the warp or bending of the substrate member 652, and the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be easily maintained.

In particular, each LED 651 is arranged in the area of the substrate member 652 where the first block 653 or the second block 654 is arranged (that is, inside the area surrounded by the four side wall portions 653b and 654b in the front view). Will be set up. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 due to the input of an external force such as vibration, or it is possible to easily correct the warp or bending of the board member 652 itself, so that the posture of the board member 652 can be changed to a desired posture. It can be easily specified. As a result, the posture of each LED 651 can be more reliably suppressed from being affected by the warp or bending of the substrate member 652, the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be further maintained. It can be done easily.

Further, each LED 651 is mounted on the front surface of the substrate member 652, while the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back surface of the substrate member 652. The LED 651 can be brought closer to the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture.

Here, the LEDs 651 are arranged at equal intervals along the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction of FIGS. 44 and 45) of the substrate member 652. That is, in the state where the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the base member 610 (front base 612), the LEDs 651 can be arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 (see FIG. 34). The uniformity of the light incident from the outer peripheral surface can be ensured.

In this case, in the present embodiment, in the second block 654, one of the fastening holes h formed at the two locations is formed in the connecting wall 654c, so that the longitudinal dimension of the second block 654 is increased accordingly. Can be shortened. Further, the second block 654 is arranged on the substrate member 652 in a posture in which the side wall portion 653b where the fastening hole h is formed is on the first block 653 side. That is, the side wall portions 653b in which the fastening holes h are not formed are located on both ends in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652.

As a result, the LEDs 651 are arranged at equal intervals in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652, and while ensuring the uniformity of the light incident on the projection plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650 is arranged in the longitudinal direction (FIGS. 44 and 45 in the left-right direction). ) Can be shortened to provide a space between adjacent irradiation units 650. In this case, the shaft portion 612f can be arranged by utilizing such a space, and as a result, the distance between the LED 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be easily brought close to each other.

On the other hand, in the first block 653, since both of the fastening holes h formed at the two locations are formed in the connecting wall 654c, the distance between the fastening hole h and the LED 651 can be shortened. That is, the position of fastening and fixing the substrate member 652 to the first block 653 by the screw S1 can be brought close to the LED 651. As a result, the influence of the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 due to the input of an external force such as vibration can be made difficult to act on the LED 651, and the warp or bending of the board member 652 itself can be made particularly easy to correct in the vicinity of the LED 651. Therefore, since the posture of each LED 651 can be more reliably suppressed from being affected by the warp or bending of the substrate member 652, the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction and the direction can be further maintained. It can be done easily.

In this case, in the first block 653, since the distance between the fastening holes h formed at the two locations becomes large, the restraint of the substrate member 652 between the fastening holes h at the two locations may be weakened. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the connecting wall 653c is provided between the side wall portions 653b where the fastening hole h is formed, and the protrusion 653c1 projecting from the connecting wall 653c is inserted into the substrate member 652. Insert it through the hole. Therefore, by engaging the protrusion 653c1 and the insertion hole, it is possible to easily suppress the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 due to the input of an external force such as vibration, or it is possible to easily correct the warp or bending of the board member 652 itself. The posture of the substrate member 652 can be easily defined as a desired posture. As a result, since it is not necessary to separately provide the screw S1 and the number of parts can be reduced, the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction while reducing the product cost by that amount, and the direction thereof can be further increased. It can be easier to maintain.

Since both ends in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 (the outermost side in the longitudinal direction, the left end and the right end in FIG. 45B) are free ends (that is, they are not constrained by the second block 654), the longitudinal direction is such. The posture of the LEDs 651 located at both ends may become unstable. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back surface side of the substrate member 652, and the substrate member 652 is elastically deformed (bent) in the direction in which the arc center is located on the front surface side thereof. ) (See FIG. 34), the elastic recovery force of the substrate member 652 can act as a force in the direction of pressing the back surfaces of both ends of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction against the front surface of the second block 654. As a result, the posture of the LEDs 651 located at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 can be stabilized.

Next, the vertical displacement unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50.

FIG. 47 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 48 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800. Further, FIG. 49 is a front perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 50 is a rear perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800.

As shown in FIGS. 47 to 50, the vertical displacement unit 800 is provided on the front base 830 having a rectangular front view, the front base 820 superimposed on the front side of the back base 830, and the back side of the back base 830. A drive motor 880 to be arranged, a displacement member 850 rotated with respect to the rear base 830 and the front base 820 by the drive force of the drive motor 880, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the drive force of the drive motor 880 to the displacement member 850. It mainly includes a connecting member 870 that connects the transmission mechanism 860 and the displacement member 850, and a cover member 840 that is arranged in front of the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 and is attached to the front base 820. ..

The rear base 830 projects to the axial centers of the opening 831 in which the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860 connected to the drive motor 880 is formed to a size that allows the transmission gear 861 to be inserted, and the transmission gears 862 and 863 of the transmission mechanism 860. It mainly includes a shaft portion 832, 833 to be formed, and a back side restricting portion 834 that is projected on the front side and extended in a curved shape.

The shaft portion of the drive motor 880 attached to the rear surface side of the rear surface base 830 is inserted through the opening 831. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 880 can be transmitted to the transmission mechanism 860 arranged on the front side of the rear base 830.

Further, the opening 831 is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860. As a result, when the transmission gear 861 is damaged, the transmission gear 861 can be removed from the vertical displacement unit 800 by removing the drive motor 880 from the rear base 830. As a result, it is possible to reduce the work process of replacing parts when the transmission gear 861 is damaged.

The shaft portions 832 and 833 are shafts for the transmission gears 862 and 863 of the transmission mechanism 860, which will be described later, to be pivotally supported and rotatably held, and are formed in a columnar shape on the front side from the rear base 830.

The back side regulating portion 834 is a protrusion that regulates the displacement of the connecting member 870 to be described later in the back direction (in the back direction of the paper in FIG. 47), is projected from the front side of the back base 830, and is a connecting member 870 described later. It is extended in a curved shape along the displacement.

The front base 820 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape with a slightly larger outer shape than the back base 830. The front base 820 has a shaft support portion 821 recessed from the front side to the back side (from the front side of the paper surface to the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 47), a side wall 822 erected on the edge portion on the back surface side, and a protrusion toward the back surface side. It mainly includes a protrusion 823 to be formed, a front side regulating portion 824 extending to the back surface side and extending in a curved shape, and a bulging portion 825 protruding to the back surface side.

The shaft support portion 821 is a shaft hole into which one end of a pin member 890, which will be described later, is inserted, and is recessed in the lower right side of the front base 820 in the front view.

The side wall 822 is a wall portion for forming a gap for arranging the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 described later between the back surface base 830 and the front base 820, and the thickness of the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction. It is erected on the upper and left and right (other than the lower end) edges of the front base 820 with dimensions larger than the dimensions. Thereby, when the front base 820 and the back base 830 are fastened, the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be arranged in a displaceable state between them.

The protrusion 823 is a protrusion to which one end side (upper side of FIG. 48) of the urging spring SP, which will be described later, is engaged, and is formed in a columnar shape and is formed so as to protrude on the back surface side of the front base 820.

The front side regulating portion 824 is a protrusion that regulates the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front direction (the direction toward the front of the paper in FIG. 47), is projected from the back side of the front base 820, and is along the displacement of the connecting member 870. It is extended in a curved shape.

The bulging portion 825 is a protruding wall arranged laterally adjacent to the urging spring SP described later at a predetermined distance, and is formed so as to project from the lower end portion of the front base 820 toward the back surface side.

The transmission mechanism 860 is a gear train composed of transmission gears 861 to 863, and by meshing with each other in series, the driving force applied from the drive motor 880 is transmitted via the transmission gears 861 and 862. Is transmitted to.

The transmission gear 863 includes a tooth portion 863a that meshes with the transmission gear 862, a shaft portion 863b that is connected to the connecting member 870, a protrusion portion 863c that projects in an arc shape centered on the shaft, and a rotation position thereof. Mainly includes a plate-shaped sensor detection plate 863d for detecting the above.

The tooth portion 863a is a tooth mating surface formed on about two-thirds of the circular side surface of the transmission gear 863, whereby the driving force can be transmitted from the transmission gear 862 to the transmission gear 863.

The shaft portion 863b is a shaft connected to the connecting member 870, and is projected in a columnar shape on the back surface side, and the shaft is arranged at a position (eccentric position) different from the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 863.

The projecting portion 863c is a protrusion for suppressing the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front direction, is formed so as to protrude from the outer edge portion on the back surface side of the transmission gear 863, and is centered on the axis of the transmission gear 863. It is formed by bending into a circular shape.

The sensor detection plate 863d is a plate that blocks the detection area of the position detection sensor (not shown) arranged on the front base in order to detect the rotational position of the transmission gear 863, and the tooth portion 863a of the transmission gear 863 is formed. It is formed so as to project radially outward on the side surface that is not.

The connecting member 870 is a member that transmits the rotational driving force of the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850, is formed by being curved in a substantially C shape in front view, and is formed in the front-rear direction at one end of the curved shape (upper end of FIG. 48). The gear-side connecting hole 871 formed through and the displacement-side connecting hole 872 formed through the other end of the curved shape (lower end in FIG. 48) in the front-rear direction, and the contact formed so as to project upward from the outside of the curved portion. A unit 873 is provided.

The gear-side connecting hole 871 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 863b. As a result, the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 can be connected, and the driving force of the transmission gear 863 can be transmitted to the connecting member 870.

The displacement-side connecting hole 872 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 853. As a result, the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 can be connected, and the driving force of the connecting member 870 can be transmitted to the displacement member 850.

The contact portion 873 is a protrusion for regulating the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the front-rear direction, and the tip thereof is arranged between the back side regulating portion 834 of the back base 830 and the front side regulating portion 824 of the front base 820. Will be done.

Further, the width dimension of the tip of the contact portion 873 in the front-rear direction is slightly smaller than the distance dimension between the back side regulation portion 834 of the back base 830 and the front side regulation portion 824 of the front base 820. It is formed. Therefore, when the connecting member 870 is displaced, the contact portion 873 is displaced in the gap between the back side regulating portion 834 and the front side regulating portion 824, so that the resistance when the connecting member 870 is displaced is large. It can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the connecting member 870 is displaced in the front-rear direction, the displacement of the connecting member 870 can be stabilized by abutting on the front base 820 or the back base 830.

The cover member 840 is a member that holds one end side (right end portion in FIG. 47) of the displacement member 850, is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in front view, and is fastened to the front base 820 with a pin member 890 in between. .. Further, the cover member 840 is formed with a shaft support portion 841 recessed in a circular shape from the back surface side to the front surface side.

The shaft support portion 841 is a groove that holds (shaft support) the pin member 890 in a rotatable state by inserting an end portion on the front side of the pin member 890, and is a position facing the shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820. Is formed in. As a result, since the pin member 890 is arranged between the shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820 and the shaft support portion 841 of the cover member 840, it is possible to prevent the pin member 890 from falling off from the vertical displacement unit 800.

The displacement member 850 is a member whose front side is decorated, and one end side (right side in FIG. 47) is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and the other end side (left side in FIG. 47) is formed in a circular shape in front view. The displacement member 850 is formed to include a shaft hole 851 through which the pin member 890 is inserted, a protrusion 852 to which the urging spring SP is connected, and a shaft portion 853 to transmit the driving force of the connecting member 870.

As described above, the shaft hole 851 is a through hole through which the pin member 890 is inserted, and is formed through the one end side of the displacement member in the front-rear direction, and its inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the pin member 890. Is also formed large. Therefore, in the displacement member 850, with the pin member 890 inserted through the shaft hole 851, the pin member 890 is arranged between the shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820 and the shaft support portion 841 of the cover member 840. The displacement member 850 can be arranged in front of the front base 820 so as to be rotatable about the axis of the shaft hole 851.

The protrusion 852 is a protrusion to which the other end (lower end of FIG. 50) of the urging spring SP is engaged, and is formed so as to protrude from the back surface side of the displacement member 850. Further, the protrusion 852 is formed at a position where the displacement member 850 projects from below the protrusion 823 of the front base 820 toward the back side when the displacement member 850 is arranged on the front base 820, and the protrusion distance thereof is the front side of the back base. It is formed up to a position that almost coincides with the side surface of. Therefore, the longitudinal direction of the urging spring SP can be made parallel to the direction of gravity. As a result, the displacement member 850 is always urged upward in the direction of gravity with respect to the front base 820.

As described above, the shaft portion 853 is a shaft inserted into the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870, and is below the front base 820 when the displacement member 850 is arranged on the front base 820 (FIG. 50). A protrusion is formed at the position (lower side). Therefore, the displacement member 850 and the connecting member 870 can be connected, and the driving force of the displacement member 850 can be transmitted to the connecting member 870.

As described above, the pin member 890 is a shaft inserted into the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850, and is formed of a metal rod-like body having a hardness higher than that of the displacement member 850. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotating shaft from being damaged when a force is applied to the rotating shaft when the displacement member 850 is displaced.

Further, the resistance of the shaft portion when the displacement member 850 rotates, the resistance when the pin member 890 rotates with respect to the respective shaft support portions 821, 841, and the resistance when the displacement member 850 rotates with respect to the pin member 890. Since it can be divided into two parts, the resistance can be prevented from being damaged due to the increase in the resistance at one place.

Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 800 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 56. 51 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the first position, FIG. 52 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the intermediate position, and FIG. 53 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the second position. Is.

54 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the first position, FIG. 55 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the intermediate position, and FIG. 56 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the second position. Is. It should be noted that FIGS. 54 to 56 show a state in which the back base 830 is removed for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 51 and 54, in the state where the other end side (left side of FIG. 52) of the displacement member 850 is arranged upward (first position), the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is arranged upward. A connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is arranged above. As a result, the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted into the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870 is arranged upward, so that the displacement member 850 is lifted upward.

Further, at the first position, a straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the shaft portion 863b was connected to the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870. The straight line is arranged on the same straight line.

Therefore, at the first position, the displacement member 850 can form a state (that is, a dead center) in which the force component in the direction of pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 to rotate the transmission gear 863 is not generated. As a result, after the displacement member 850 is arranged at the first position, it is possible to suppress the rattling of the displacement member 850 and improve the durability.

From the states shown in FIGS. 51 and 54, power is supplied to the drive motor 880 to rotationally drive the drive motor 880, and when each transmission gear 861,862,863 (transmission mechanism 860) is rotated, the transmission gear 863 The shaft portion 863b is displaced downward. Therefore, the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is pushed downward as the shaft portion 863b is rotationally driven. As a result, the displacement-side connecting hole 872 formed on the other end side (lower side of FIGS. 54 and 55) of the connecting member 870 pushes down the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850, and the displacement member 850 can be rotated.

In this case, by rotating the transmission gear 863, the straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the shaft portion 863b, and the displacement of the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870. It is assumed that the straight line connecting the side connecting holes 872 has a tolerance. Therefore, the displacement member 850 can release the state (that is, the dead center) in which the force component in the direction of pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 to rotate the transmission gear 863 is not generated. As a result, when the transmission gear 863 starts to rotate in the rotation direction (rotation to the right in FIG. 54) that displaces the displacement member 850, the force of pulling the gear side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 780 by the gravity of the displacement member 850 is applied. , The transmission gear 863 can be applied in the direction of rotation. As a result, the energy consumption of the drive motor 880 when displaced from the first position can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 and 55, power is supplied to the drive motor 880 after the displacement member 850 is displaced from the state shown in FIGS. 51 and 54 (that is, the state located at the dead center). I will explain when is turned off.

As shown in FIGS. 52 and 55, in a state where the power supply to the drive motor 880 is turned off after the displacement from the first position, the axis (rotation center) of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft of the transmission gear 863. At a position where the direction connecting the portion 863b and the direction connecting the gear side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 and the displacement side connecting hole 872 are substantially orthogonal to each other, the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elastic recovery of the urging spring SP It is considered to be in a state where the force is balanced (intermediate position).

Therefore, when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the first position to the second position described later, the power supply to the drive motor 880 is turned off so that the displacement member 850 is centered on the intermediate position (balanced position). The displacement member 850 can be made to perform a reciprocating displacement due to the acting weight and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP. That is, the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the gravity direction can be regarded as the normal projection motion of the constant velocity circular motion, and the displacement velocity can be changed, so that the displacement member can be displaced in an interesting manner.

On the other hand, if power is supplied to the drive motor 880 and a driving force is applied from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850 via the connecting member 870, the displacement is different from the above-mentioned displacement (normal projection motion of constant velocity circular motion). In the embodiment, the displacement member 850 can be displaced between the first position and the second position, and the variation of the displacement can be increased accordingly. That is, by simply turning on or off the power supply to the drive motor 880 and switching whether or not to apply the driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850, the variation of displacement can be increased, and the structure and control can be controlled. Since it does not need to be complicated, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the reliability.

Further, as described above, since the displacement member 850 is subjected to rotational displacement about the shaft hole 851, the application of the driving force of the displacement member 850 is released from the transmission mechanism 860, and the action of the gravity of the displacement member 850 is released. When the displacement member 850 is subjected to a reciprocating displacement due to the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP, the displacement on the other end side (left side of FIG. 52) of the displacement member 850 is not limited to the linear motion in the vertical direction. The displacement can be combined with the rotational movement centered on the shaft hole 851. As a result, the displacement member 850 can be displaced in an interesting manner.

In this case, the connecting member 870 connected to the displacement member 850 is pushed and pulled (displaced in the vertical direction) with the displacement of the displacement member 850 to rotate the transmission gear 863, and the transmission gear is rotated with the push and pull. Since the posture of the 863 is changed, the magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member in the push-pull direction can be changed. That is, when the displacement member 850 is reciprocally displaced, the magnitude of the resistance received by the displacement member 850 from the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be changed. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850, and it is possible to make the displacement member perform an interesting displacement.

Further, as described above, in a state where the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP are balanced (intermediate position), the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 Since the straight line connecting the axes and the straight line connecting the axes of the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 and the axis of the displacement-side connecting hole 872 are located at substantially orthogonal positions, the force in the push-pull direction is applied. The magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the transmission gear 863 can be maximized at the equilibrium position (intermediate position), and the force component can be reduced in either direction of pushing or pulling from the equilibrium position. .. That is, when the displacement member 850 is reciprocally displaced, the resistance received by the displacement member 850 from the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be changed substantially symmetrically with respect to the equilibrium position, so that the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850 can be performed. Can be easily continued.

From the state shown in FIGS. 52 and 55, when power is supplied to the drive motor 880 and each transmission gear 861,862,863 (transmission mechanism 860) is further rotated, the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is further lowered. Is displaced to. Therefore, the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is further pushed downward as the shaft portion 863b is driven to rotate. As a result, the displacement-side connecting hole 872 formed on the other end side of the connecting member 870 can push down the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 to rotate the displacement member 850.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 56, in the state where the other end side (left side of FIG. 53) of the displacement member 850 is arranged in the descending position (second position), the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is arranged downward. , The connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is arranged below. As a result, the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted into the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870 is arranged downward, so that the displacement member 850 can be in a downwardly depressed posture.

Further, in the second position, the straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863, the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863, and the displacement side connection of the connecting member 870 are connected. The straight line connecting the axial centers of the holes 872 is arranged in the same straight line length.

Therefore, at the second position, the displacement member 850 can form a state (that is, a dead center) in which the force component in the direction of pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 to rotate the transmission gear 863 is not generated. As a result, after the displacement member 850 is arranged at the second position, the rattling of the displacement member 850 can be suppressed and the durability can be improved.

Next, the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 will be described with reference to FIG. 57. 57 (a) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 at the first position, and FIG. 57 (b) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 at the intermediate position, FIG. 57. (C) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 at the second position. In FIGS. 57 (a) to 57 (c), a part of the transmission gear 863 (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 located in front of the connecting member 870) is shown by a broken line.

As shown in FIG. 57 (a), in the first position, the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 is arranged at a position facing the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, since the gap in the front-rear direction of the connecting member 870 arranged between the rear base 830 and the transmission gear 863 can be reduced, the connecting member 870 can be easily brought into contact with the rear base 830 or the transmission gear 863.

Therefore, in the first position, the resistance when driving the displacement member 850 can be increased. As a result, in the first position, it is preferable that the displacement member 850 is arranged above and the displacement member 850 is stopped in order to form a retracted state in which the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player. However, the resistance for driving the displacement member 850 can be increased to facilitate the maintenance of the stopped state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 57 (b) and 57 (c), a state in which electric power is applied to the drive motor 880 and the transmission gear 863 is rotated by a certain amount or more (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 is second. In the state of driving the drive range θ6), the connecting member 870 and the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 are not opposed to each other in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated more than a certain amount, the gap in the front-rear direction of the connecting member 870 arranged between the transmission gear 863 and the rear base 830 can be increased, so that the resistance when the connecting member 870 is displaced can be increased. Can be made smaller.

Therefore, when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the first position to the second position, it is preferable to displace it in front of the third symbol display device 81 in a short time, but the resistance to displace the connecting member 870 is reduced. , The displacement member 850 can be displaced from the first position to the second position in a short time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (c), at the second position, the contact portion 873c of the connecting member 870 can be brought into contact with the tooth portion 863a of the transmission gear 863.

Here, when the displacement member that is displaced vertically is displaced downward and stopped, the gravity of the displacement member is added to the inertial force at the time of stop, so that the displacement member cannot be stopped quickly. was there.

On the other hand, in the vertical displacement unit 800, when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the contact portion 873c of the connecting member 870 can be brought into contact with the transmission gear 863, so that the displacement member 850 is displaced. The force for stopping the displacement is two: a force that is stopped when the connecting member 870 comes into contact with the transmission gear 863 and a force that is stopped by stopping the rotation of the transmission gear 863 (driving the drive motor 880). It can be dispersed into one. As a result, the displacement member 850 displaced from the first position to the second position of the displacement member 850 can be quickly stopped at the second position.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (c), the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 when displaced from the first position will be described. 58 (a) to 58 (c) are rear views of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the first drive range θ5. It should be noted that FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (c) show the transition state from the first position. Further, in FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (c), a part of the transmission gear 863 (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 located in front of the connecting member 870) is shown by a broken line.

As shown in FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (c), when the transmission gear 863 is rotated and the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 displaces the first drive range θ5, it is second from the first position. As the displacement to the position, the portion where the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 face each other can be reduced.

Therefore, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated from the first position, the resistance that displaces the displacement member 850 can be reduced with the displacement, so that the displacement member 850 can be smoothly displaced.

Further, when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the second position to the first position, the sliding resistance of the displacement member 850 can be increased while being displaced to the first position of the retracted position, so that the displacement member 850 is first. When the displacement member 850 is displaced to a position and stopped, the displacement member 850 can be quickly stopped.

That is, when the displacement member 850 is displaced and stopped, it is difficult to quickly form a stopped state due to the inertial force for stopping the operation, but the resistance of the displacement member 850 at the time of stopping can be increased, so that the stopped state is quickly formed. can do.

On the other hand, when the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 displaces the second drive range θ6, the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 are not arranged at positions facing each other in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the resistance for displacement of the displacement member 850 can be reduced. As a result, when the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 drives the second drive range θ6, the displacement member 850 can be quickly displaced, and the effect of the overhanging operation of the displacement member 850 can be enhanced.

Further, in the second drive range θ6, when the driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850 is released and the displacement member 850 is reciprocated with the displacement member 850 as the center of the intermediate position (balanced position), the protrusion is provided. It is possible to avoid the generation of resistance by the portion 863c and smoothly perform the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850.

Next, the contact portion 873, the front base 820, and the back base 830 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 (a) to 59 (c). 59 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 54, and FIG. 59 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 55. FIG. 59 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the LIXc-LIXc line of FIG. 56.

As shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), the tip of the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 is between the front side regulating portion 824 of the front base 820 and the back side regulating portion 834 of the back base 830. Is placed in.

That is, the front side regulating portion 824 of the front base 820 and the back side regulating portion 834 of the back base 830 are formed in a curved shape due to the displacement of the tip of the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870. As a result, the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction is restricted.

Here, since the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 are in a state where the shaft portion 853 is inserted into the displacement side connecting hole 872, the displacement member 850 is tilted in the front-rear direction by the amount of the gap between the shaft and the hole. As a result, there is a problem that the displacement side connecting hole 872 or the shaft portion 853 is deformed.

On the other hand, since the vertical displacement unit 800 is suppressed from being tilted in the front-rear direction by the contact portion 873, the displacement member 850 can be smoothly displaced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (c), when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the rear side restricting portion 834 of the rear base 830 faces the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870. It can be in a state where it is not placed in.

As a result, the gap between the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 at the second position and the front base 820 and the back base 830 can be increased. As a result, the resistance when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the second position to the first position can be reduced, and the displacement member 850 can be easily displaced from the second position.

Further, the vertical displacement unit 800 is on a substantially straight line in which the contact portion 873 connects the axial center of the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 and the axial center of the gear side connecting hole of the connecting member 870, and the transmission gear 863 and It is arranged on the side opposite to the axis of the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 with the axis of the gear-side connecting hole of the connecting member 870 interposed therebetween (see FIG. 54).

Therefore, when the connecting member 870 rattles with respect to the front base 820 and the back base 830, the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 is brought into contact with the front base 820 and the back base 830, whereby the shaft of the transmission gear 863 is shafted. It is possible to easily suppress the inclination of the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the portion 863b and the connecting member 870. As a result, the driving force of the driving motor 880 can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member 850 via the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63. In the first embodiment, the outer diameter dimension of the projection plate member 620 is set smaller than that of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640, but in the second embodiment, the outer diameter dimension of the projection plate member 620 is set. It is set to be the same as the outer diameter dimension of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640.

First, the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

60 (a) is a front view of the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 60 (b) is a projection on the LXb-LXb line of FIG. 60 (a). It is sectional drawing of the plate member 2620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640.

As shown in FIGS. 60A and 60B, a gear member 630 and a groove forming member 2640 are arranged on the back surface side and the front surface side, respectively, on the outer peripheral edge portion of the projection plate member 2620. The projection plate member 2620 is formed in a circular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and its outer diameter is formed to be the same as the outer diameter of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640. Further, the projection plate member 2620 includes a notch portion 621 and a reflection portion 622 that diffusely reflects light in a part of the outer edge.

The groove forming member 2640 is made of a light transmissive material having a refractive index lower than that of the projection plate member 2620, and is formed in an annular shape in front view and has a U-shape whose cross section is concave from the outer edge side to the inner edge side. The guide groove 2641 is provided. Further, the groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the front side (upper side of FIG. 60B) of the projection plate member 2620, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 2620. Further, the groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the hidden region side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612).

The guide groove 2641 is a groove for guiding the collar C inward, and the recessed width is formed to be larger than the axial dimension of the protruding portion C1 of the collar C. Therefore, the projection plate member 2620 is rotatably held by the base member 610 by guiding the plurality of collars C rotatably supported by the base member 610 to the guide groove 2641.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63.

61 to 63 are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640. In addition, in FIG. 61 (b), FIG. 62 (b) and FIG. 63 (b), the illustration of the cross-sectional line is omitted for the sake of easy understanding.

Further, in FIGS. 61 (b), 62 (b), and 63 (b), light from the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640, as in the first embodiment. The refraction angle at the time of this is considered to have no effect on the present invention, and the light incident on the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640 from the light source A is shown in a orthogonal manner. Further, in FIGS. 61 to 63, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by the virtual line M, as in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light having an irradiation angle α2 that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 2620 is the outer edge of the projection plate member 620. It is incident from the side surface of the part. The light incident on the projection plate member 2620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the side surfaces on the front side and the back side of the projection plate member 2620. As a result, the light incident on the projection plate member 2620 can travel from the edge side of the projection plate member 2620 toward the central portion (axis center). Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is diffusely reflected by the reflecting unit 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine.

In this case, the projection plate member 2620 is formed to have a larger outer dimension than the projection plate member 620 in the first embodiment. Thereby, the edge portion of the projection plate member 2620 can be arranged near the LED 651 (light source A). Therefore, since the irradiation angle α2 of the second embodiment can be made larger than the irradiation angle α1 of the first embodiment, the amount of light (light amount) projected on the projection plate member 2620 can be increased accordingly. can. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 2620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the amount of light emitted by the LED 651.

As shown in FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the irradiation that irradiates the groove forming member 640 on the front side (upper side of FIG. 62 (a)) from the guide groove 641. Light at an angle β2 is incident on the front edge of the groove forming member 2640.

The light irradiated in the range of the irradiation angle β2 and incident on the groove forming member 2640 is reflected inside the groove forming member 2640 and travels toward the axial center side of the projection plate member 2620. In this case, as in the first embodiment, at the position where the side surface of the groove forming member 2640 and the projection plate member 2620 are adjacent to each other (facing), the light radiated to the inner side surface of the groove forming member 2640 is emitted to the projection plate member 2620. Can be incident on.

As shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the groove forming member 2640 on the back surface side (lower side of FIG. 62 (a)) of the guide groove 641 is irradiated. The light having the irradiation angle Δ2 is incident from the back surface side edge of the groove forming member 2640.

The light irradiated in the range of the irradiation angle Δ2 and incident on the groove forming member 2640 is reflected on the side surface of the guide groove 2641 of the groove forming member 2640. The reflected light can be incident on the projection plate member 2620 by irradiating the side surface of the groove forming member 2640 and the side surface at the position where the projection plate member 2620 is adjacent (facing).

That is, by denting the guide groove 2641 on the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, the light incident on the groove forming member 2640 from between the guide groove 2641 and the projection plate member 2620 is transmitted to the side surface of the guide groove 2641. It can be reflected and incident on the projection plate member 2620.

Therefore, by forming the guide groove 2641 by recessing it on the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, the role of holding the color C and the role of collecting light on the projection plate member 2620 can be combined. ..

Further, as compared with the first embodiment, the amount of light (light amount) incident on the projection plate member 2620 from the groove forming member 2640 can be increased by the amount of the irradiation angle Δ added. Therefore, it is possible to increase the intensity (light amount) of the light emitted from the projection plate member 2620 without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the light intensity (light amount) of the LED 651 to irradiate. ..

Further, since the groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612), it can be difficult for the player to see, and the appearance can be improved accordingly. It can be suppressed from getting worse.

Of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light irradiating the gear member 630 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. In the first embodiment, the state in which the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are in contact with each other over the entire circumference of the outer edge portion of the projection plate member 620 has been described, but the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 in the third embodiment have been described. , A floating surface is formed with respect to the projection plate member 3620.

First, the shapes of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

64 (a) is a front view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 64 (b) is a projection on the LXIVb-LXIVb line of FIG. 64 (a). It is sectional drawing of the plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640.

65 (a) is a side view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 in the direction of the arrow LXV of FIG. 64 (a), and FIG. 65 (b) is a side view of FIG. 65 (a). It is sectional drawing of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 in the LXVb-LXVb line, and FIG. 65 (c) is the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 in the LXVc-LXVc line of FIG. And is a cross-sectional view of the groove forming member 640.

As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the projection plate member 3620 according to the third embodiment is formed into a plate-like body having a circular front view, and a gear member 3630 and a groove forming member 3640 are formed on the outer peripheral edge thereof on the back side and the front surface. It is arranged on each side. Further, the projection plate member 3620 has an outer diameter larger than that of the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, and a protrusion 3623 projecting to the front side and the back side is formed on the outer edge portion thereof.

The protrusion 3623 is formed in a substantially triangular cross section protruding toward the front side (upper side in FIG. 64 (b)) or the back side (lower side in FIG. 64 (b)) toward the outer edge portion. Further, the protrusion 3623 projecting to the front side is set on the line of the virtual line F whose tip portion connects the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge end portion of the concave groove 3645 formed in the groove forming member 3640 described later. Will be done. On the other hand, the protruding portion 3623 protruding to the back side is set on the line of the virtual line G whose tip portion connects the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge end portion of the concave groove 3635 formed in the gear member 3630 described later. To.

The gear member 3630 is formed in an annular plate shape in front view, and is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620. Further, the gear member 3630 is screwed through a concave groove 3635 which is recessed on the side surface on the front side (upper side of FIG. 64 (b)) at a predetermined interval and is formed through the groove 3635 at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction. A stop hole 636 for use is provided.

The concave groove 3635 is a groove recessed in the radial direction, and is formed on both sides of each stop hole 636. Thereby, when the gear member 3630 is arranged on the projection plate member 3620, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 (see FIG. 64 (b)).

The groove forming member 3640 is formed in a plate-like body having an annular shape in front view, and is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620. Further, the groove forming member 3640 is formed through the concave groove 3645 which is recessed on the side surface of the back surface side (lower side in FIG. 64B) at a predetermined interval and the groove forming member 3645 at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction. It is provided with an opening 646 for screwing.

The concave groove 3645 is a groove recessed in the radial direction, and is formed at a position facing the concave groove 3636 formed in the gear member 3630. Thereby, when the groove forming member 3640 is arranged on the projection plate member 3620, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 65, the surface on which the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 are in contact with each other has an opening 646 into which the bolt T for fastening the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is inserted. It is a surface that overlaps in the radial direction. As a result, when a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the holding force. That is, when forming a gap between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640 can be grounded by the diameter of the opening 646. Therefore, it is possible to secure a holding surface for sandwiching the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIG. 66.

66 (a) and 66 (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of a projection plate member 620, a gear member 630, and a groove forming member 640. In FIG. 66 (b), the cross-sectional line is omitted for ease of understanding.

Further, in FIG. 66 (b), as in the first embodiment, the refraction angle when the light from the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 has an influence on the present invention. The light incident on the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 from the light source A is shown in an orthogonal manner. Further, in FIG. 66, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M as in the first embodiment.

Of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 as shown in FIGS. 66A and 66B, the light having an irradiation angle α3 that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 3620 is the outer edge of the projection plate member 3620. It is incident from the side.

The light incident on the projection plate member 3620 is totally reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the side surfaces on the front side and the back side of the projection plate member 3620. As a result, the light incident on the projection plate member 3620 can travel from the edge portion of the projection plate member 3620 toward the center side (axis center side). Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α3 passes through the projection plate member 3620, is diffusely reflected by the reflecting unit 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine.

In this case, in the third embodiment, since a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630, the light incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 3620 is reflected by the reflecting portion 622. Can be easily reached. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 3620 can be easily reached to the reflecting portion 622. Therefore, the light reflected by the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 3620 is strengthened to make the pattern. And patterns can be clearly highlighted.

On the other hand, the light irradiated to the irradiation angle other than the irradiation angle α3 is incident on the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630. In this case, since the groove forming member 3640, the gear member 3630, and the projection plate member are arranged with a gap as described above, the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630 is first executed. It is not incident on the projection plate member 620 side as in the form.

Therefore, the light of the light source other than the light source A of the LED 651 is projected onto the projection plate member 3620 side, and the light is incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630, so that the light of the light source other than the light source A is applied to the projection plate member 3620. Can be suppressed from being incident. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display applied to the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 3620 from appearing (displayed) by light other than the LED 651.

Further, as described above, since the ground contact surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is a surface that radially overlaps the opening 646 (see FIG. 65 (c)), it is usually used. A place where light is not incident can be a ground plane.

That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646, when light is incident from the radial outside of the opening 646, the light is blocked by the bolt T and the light of the LED 651 is not incident on the reflecting portion 622 side. Therefore, it is possible to reliably suppress that the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from the LED 651 is incident on the projection plate member 3620 side.

Further, in this case, since the ground contact surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 can be formed over the entire surface overlapping the opening 646 in the radial direction, the ground contact surface can be secured and the projection can be performed. It is possible to prevent the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from shifting with respect to the plate member 3620.

Here, if a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630, the light of the LED 651 is inserted into the axial center side of the projection plate member 3620 from the gap. There was a risk that light would leak from the edges of the projection plate member 3620 to the center.

On the other hand, since the protrusion 3623 is formed at the edge of the projection plate member 3620 of the third embodiment, the light of the light source A of the LED 651 is connected to the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630. The gap is not irradiated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent light from leaking from the edge portion of the projection plate member 3620 to the central portion.

Further, since the protrusion 3623 makes it possible to lengthen the dimension of the side surface of the edge portion of the projection plate member 3620 in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 66A), the angle of the irradiation angle α3 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the intensity (light amount) of the light emitted from the projection plate member 3620 without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 3620 or increasing the light intensity (light amount) of the LED 651 to irradiate. ..

Next, the irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. The same parts as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 67 (a) is a top view of the irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 67 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the irradiation unit 4650. Further, FIG. 68 (a) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit 4600 in the vicinity of the first block 653, and FIG. 68 (b) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit 4600 in the vicinity of the second block 654. Note that FIG. 67 (b) corresponds to FIG. 44 (b). Further, in FIG. 68, a state in which the irradiation unit 4650 is arranged on the base member 610 is schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 67, in the irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are fastened and fixed to the substrate member 620 by screws S2. In this case, the height dimension of the head of the screw S2 (vertical dimension in FIG. 67) is set to be larger than the height dimension of the LED 651. That is, the amount of protrusion of the screw S2 from the front surface of the substrate member 620 is made larger than the amount of protrusion of the LED 651.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 68, the height dimension of the head of the screw S2 is such that the projection plate member 620 is placed on the head of one screw S2 and the screw S2 adjacent to the one screw S2. When the outer peripheral surface is abutted (external), the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 is set to a size that cannot be contacted with the LED 651 arranged between the two screws S2.

Thereby, the LED 651 can be protected by the head of the screw S2. That is, when the projection plate member 620 is rotated, for example, when it is brought close to the irradiation unit 2650 due to radial rattling based on dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances, the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 is screwed. By contacting the head of S2, contact with the LED 651 can be avoided, and as a result, damage to the LED 651 can be suppressed.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the projection plate member 620 is formed of a resin material, whereas the screw S2 is formed of a metal material, so that the LED 651 is protected when the projection plate member 620 rattles in the radial direction. Can enhance the effect of Further, when the projection plate member 620 is continuously rotated while being in contact with the screw S2, the projection plate member 620 is worn, so that the projection plate member 620 rattles in the radial direction. Also, it is possible to avoid contact with the LED 651.

As described above, since the LED 651 can be protected by using the screw S2, the formation of the intermediate standing portions 611b and 612b can be omitted. Therefore, in this case, since the complicated shape can be omitted, the shapes of the back base 611 and the front base 612 can be simplified, and the moldability in the resin molding can be improved. As a result, the yield can be improved.

Further, since the LED 651 can be protected by using the screw S2, the allowable amount of radial rattling due to the dimensional tolerance and the assembly tolerance of the parts can be relaxed, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased. That is, the LED 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be brought closer to each other, and as a result, the light emitted from the LED 651 can be efficiently incident on the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620.

Next, the projection unit 5600 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 76. In the first embodiment, the case where the projection plate member 620 is formed in the shape of a front view disk and is rotated about the center of the circle has been described. However, in the fifth embodiment, the projection plate member 5620 is a vertically long rectangle in front view. The case where it is formed in the above direction and is slid and displaced in one direction will be described.

First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 69 is a front view of the projection unit 5600 according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 70 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit 5600. FIG. 71 is a rear view of the front base 5612. FIG. 72 is a rear view of the projection unit 5600. Note that FIG. 72 shows a state in which the back base 5611 is removed.

As shown in FIGS. 69 to 72, the projection unit 5600 is arranged so as to be slidably displaceable in the base member 5610 which is formed in a front view circular shape and whose central portion is open and the opening portion of the base member 5610. The projection plate member 5620, the irradiation unit 650 for incident light from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 5620, the drive motor 661 for sliding displacement of the projection plate member 5620, and the drive force of the drive motor 661 are transferred to the projection plate member. It is mainly provided with a gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668) for transmitting to the 5620.

The base member 5610 is formed in a circular shape in front view, and is arranged in front of the back base 5611 having a horizontally long rectangular opening at the center thereof and the back base 5611 having substantially the same outer shape as the back base 5611. The front base 5612 is provided, and the projection plate member 5620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5665) are provided in the internal space formed between the facing surfaces of the back base 5611 and the front base 5612. 5668) is stored.

As described above, the front base 5612 is a plate member formed in a circular shape in front view, and has an outer standing portion 612c erected on the outer edge portion on the back side and an opening in a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view in the center portion. The central opening 5612h to be formed, the inner standing portion 612a erected on the back side edge of the central opening 5612h, and a pair of left and right holding portions 5612i protruding from the upper ends of the central opening 5612h. It is mainly provided with two shaft portions 5612k formed so as to project from between the pair of holding portions 5612i to the back surface side, and a sliding projection 5612 m formed to project from below the central opening portion 5612h to the back surface side. Rectangle.

The central opening 5612h is opened in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the central portion of the front base 5612 in front view. The player can visually recognize the pattern or symbol of the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back side of the projection unit 5600 through the central opening 5612h.

The holding portion 5612i is a protruding portion for holding the rod member 5625, which will be described later, and is formed so as to protrude on the back side (front side of the paper surface of FIG. 71) of the front base 5612 at both upper ends of the central opening portion 5612h. Further, the holding portion 5612i is formed with a concave groove 5612i1 which is recessed on the protruding surface thereof on the front side (the back side of the paper surface of FIG. 71).

The concave groove 5612i1 is recessed in a cross-sectional arc shape from the central portion of the front base 5612 in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 71) toward the end side, and the inner diameter of the concave groove 5612i1 is the outer diameter of the rod member 5625 described later. Is formed larger than. Further, the pair of concave grooves 5612i1 are formed at the same height in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 71), and the distance dimension between the ends in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 71) is the axis of the rod member 5625. It is set larger than the directional dimension. Therefore, after the rod member 5625 is arranged on the inner peripheral surface of the concave groove 5612i1, a groove having a radius larger than the outer diameter of the rod member 5625 is located at a position facing the concave groove 5612i1 from the back surface side (front side of the paper in FIG. 71). By disposing the holding portion cover 5628 provided with the above at both ends, the rod member 5625 can be arranged on the front base 5612 (see FIG. 72).

The shaft portion 5612k is a protrusion that serves as a rotation axis of the rotating member 5670 described later, and is arranged at a position symmetrical with respect to the vertical line passing through the center of the disk-shaped front base 5612 above the central opening portion 5612h.

The sliding protrusion 5612m is a protrusion that guides the displacement of the rack 5627, which will be described later, and is formed in a columnar shape from the lower side to the back side of the central opening portion 5612h. Further, the pair of sliding protrusions 5612m are arranged at positions symmetrical with respect to the perpendicular line passing through the center of the disk-shaped front base 5612.

The projection plate member 5620 is made of a light-transmitting material, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player, and when the light of the LED 651 is incident, the incident light is used as a pattern or a pattern. It is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 in the form of a pattern. That is, a pattern or a symbol can be highlighted (displayed) on the front surface of the third symbol display device 81.

The projection plate member 5620 includes a rack 5627 extending in the left-right direction at a lower end portion, and a reflection portion 622 formed inside the projection plate member 5620. The rack 5627 is arranged below the opening at the center of the base member 610 (center opening 5612h of the front base 5612), and is arranged at a position invisible from the front side of the projected unit 5600 in the assembled state. Further, the rack 5627 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, and its longitudinal dimension is set longer than the dimension in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 72) of the projection plate member 5620. As a result, the movable range of the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620 can be made larger than the horizontal dimension of the projection plate member 5620.

In the rack 5627, a rack gear 5627a meshed with the gear 5668 is engraved on the lower surface thereof, and a sliding groove 5627b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the central portion thereof.

The rack gear 5627a is a gear tooth surface that displaces the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) in the left-right direction when the driving force of the drive motor 661 is transmitted via a gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668). There is, and it is formed in the entire area on the lower surface side of the rack 5627.

The sliding groove 5627b is a groove for suppressing the rack 5627 from tilting when the rack 5627 is displaced in the left-right direction by the drive of the drive motor 661. A pair of sliding protrusions 5612m of the base 5612 are inserted. As a result, when the rack 5627 is displaced with respect to the rear base 5611, the displacement direction is restricted and the rack 5627 is slid and displaced. The detailed operation of the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) will be described later.

Above the back side of the projection plate member 5620, a columnar rod member 5625 extending in the left-right direction (FIG. 72 left-right direction) and a horizontally long rectangle facing the projection plate member 5620 across the rod member 5625. A front cover 5626 having a shape is arranged.

The rod member 5625 is formed to be longer in the left-right direction than the length dimension in the left-right direction of the projection plate member 5620 and shorter than the outer diameter of the back base 5611, and the front cover 5626 and the projection plate member 5620 are formed. It is sandwiched between them and arranged on the projection plate member 5620.

The front cover 5626 is a plate member guided by the rod member 5625, and the length dimension in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 72) is set to be substantially the same as the length dimension in the left-right direction of the projection plate member 5620. The rod member 5625 is sandwiched between the member 5620 and the projection plate member 5620.

The front cover 5626 is provided with a groove portion 5626a recessed in the front side (back side of the paper surface of FIG. 72) and recessed in the left-right direction on the side surface facing the projection plate member 5620. The groove portion 5626a is a groove in which the rod member 5625 is arranged inside, and is recessed in a substantially U-shaped cross section, and the recessed dimension in the vertical direction and the front side is set to be larger than the outer diameter dimension of the rod member 5625. Will be done.

Thereby, the rod member 5625 can be arranged inside the groove portion 5626a. Thereby, the projection plate member 5620 can be disposed with respect to the rod member 5625 so as to be slidably displaceable in the axial direction of the rod member 5625.

Further, the rod member 5625 is arranged on the back side of the front cover 5626 with respect to the front side surface. That is, since the rod member 5625 can be arranged so as not to protrude from the front surface of the front cover 5626, the front cover 5626 can be arranged on the projection plate member 5620 without forming a recessed portion on the projection plate member 5620.

Here, when the rod member 5625 protrudes from the front surface of the front cover 5626, it is necessary to form a groove for inserting the rod member 5625 on the back surface side of the projection plate member 5620. However, the projection plate member 5620 is a member that emits light incident inside the projection plate member 5620 from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620 in the form of a pattern or a pattern, and forms a groove in the projection plate member 5620. When the thickness dimension is partially reduced, the light incident on the inside of the projection plate member 5620 becomes difficult to travel and the amount of light emitted from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620 decreases as the thickness dimension is reduced. There was a problem.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the projection plate member 5620 can be arranged on the front cover 5626 in the state where the rod member 5625 is arranged inside without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 5620. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light incident on the inside of the projection plate member 5620 from becoming difficult to travel, and to suppress the decrease in the amount of light emitted from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620.

Further, as described above, both ends of the rod member 5625 are arranged so as not to fall off from the front base 5612, so that the projection plate member 5620 can slide in the axial direction of the rod member 5625 with respect to the front base 5612. Be retained. That is, the projection plate member 5620 is suspended and arranged on the rod member 5625 so as to be slidably displaceable in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 72).

Therefore, when a driving force is applied to the drive motor 661, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 5627 via a gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668), and the rack 5627 is slid and displaced in the left-right direction. .. When the rack 5627 is slid and displaced in the left-right direction, the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 can be displaced in the slide direction.

In the irradiation unit 650, the first block 653 is arranged substantially linearly along the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620, and the LED 651 arranged in front of the first block is arranged with the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620. It is placed at the opposite position. As a result, the light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 can be incident on the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620 to make the pattern or pattern of the reflection portion 622 of the projection plate member 5620 stand out.

Further, on the side surface of the front base 5612 on which the first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is arranged, a bulging portion 5612n that bulges in a substantially rectangular shape in the rear view is formed on the back side (front side of the paper in FIG. 71). The bulging portion 5612n is a portion for raising the first block 653 toward the back surface side, and the raising dimension thereof is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the rotating member 5670 described later. Thereby, the rotating member 5670 described later can be arranged in the gap between the second block 654 and the front base 6512.

Further, a protrusion 612g is formed on the bulging portion 5612n. The first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is arranged in the irradiation unit 5600 by inserting a protrusion 612 g into the insertion hole 653b1 and sandwiching it between the front base 5612 and the back base 5611.

A rotating member 5670 is attached to the front side of the second block 654 arranged at both ends of the irradiation unit 650.

The rotating member 5670 is a plate member that is bent and formed in an L-shape in a front view, is arranged on the front base 5612 with the bent portion located on the center side in the left-right direction, and is an irradiation unit on one side on the longitudinal side. The second block 654 of 650 is attached. Further, a through hole 5671 penetrated in the front-rear direction is formed in the bent portion of the rotating member 5670.

The through hole 5671 is an opening into which the shaft portion 5612k of the front base 5612 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 5612k. Therefore, when the rotating member 5670 is arranged on the front base 5612, the rotating member 5670 can rotate about the shaft portion 5612k with respect to the front base 5612.

Here, since the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the rotating member 5670, the irradiation unit 650 can be displaced when the rotating member 5670 is rotated with respect to the front base 5612. That is, by displacing the rotating member 5670, the base member 652 of the irradiation unit 650 can be bent to displace the second block 654 with respect to the first block 653.

The rotating member 5670 is urged by an urging spring (not shown) interposed between the rotating member 5670 and the front base 5612 in a direction in which the tip portion on one side is displaced downward with respect to the shaft portion 5612k. It is arranged in 5612. Further, a displacement regulating protrusion 5612j projecting to the back surface side is formed on the lower side of the shaft portion 5612k of the front base 5612 on which the rotating member 5670 is arranged.

The displacement regulating protrusion 5612j is a member that regulates the downward displacement of one end side of the rotating member 5670, and the protruding tip thereof is rearward (on the rear base 5611 side) of the rotating member 5670 in a state where the protruding tip is arranged on the front base 5612. It is positioned and formed on the front side (front base 5612 side) of the irradiation unit 650 attached to the rotating member 5670. As a result, the downward displacement of the rotating member 5670 on the one end side is regulated by the displacement regulating projection 5612j of the rotating member 5670, and the light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 to the projection plate member 5620 side is the displacement regulating projection. It is possible to suppress the interruption by 5612j.

Next, the operation of the projection unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 76. 73 (a) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 73 (b) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state. 74 (a) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 74 (b) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state.

75 (a) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 75 (b) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the third state. FIG. 76 (a) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 76 (b) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state. Note that FIGS. 74 and 76 show a state in which the back base 5611 is removed. Further, since the displacement operation from the first state to the third state is only the displacement operation from the first state to the second state and the displacement direction reversed left and right, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 73 (a) and 74 (a), in the first state in which the projection plate member 5620 is arranged at the substantially central portion on the left and right sides of the central opening portion 5612h, the rotations arranged on both sides in the left-right direction. The member 5670 is urged by an urging spring (not shown) so that one end side is displaced downward. As a result, the second block 654 of the irradiation unit 650 arranged on the rotating member 5670 can be displaced with respect to the first block 653, and the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged on the front surface of the second block 654 can be changed. It can be tilted toward the projection plate member 5620. As a result, the light of the LED 651 arranged on the front surface of the second block 654 can be incident from the left and right sides (left and right sides of FIG. 74 (a)) of the projection plate member 5620, and the light of the LED 651 can be incidented by that amount. The amount of light emitted from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased, and the pattern or pattern of the projection plate member 5620 can be clearly displayed.

From the state shown in FIGS. 73 (a) and 74 (a), a driving force is applied to the drive motor 661, and the driving force is applied to the rack 5627 via a gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668). When the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is also slid and displaced to the right in the front view (see FIG. 73 (b) and FIG. 74 (b)). ). As a result, a second state is formed in which the projection plate member 5620 is arranged on the right side of the front view with respect to the central opening portion 5612h.

In this case, the front cover 5626 arranged on the front side of the upper end portion of the projection plate member 5620 is in contact with the side surface on the other end side of the L-shaped front view of the rotating member 5670 arranged in the slide direction. As a result, a rotational moment in the direction of pushing up one end side upward can be applied to the rotating member 5670 around the axis of the shaft portion 5612k which is the axis of rotation. Therefore, since one end side of the rotating member 5670 is pushed upward, the second block 654 arranged on the rotating member 5670 is also displaced with respect to the first block 653 in the longitudinal direction of the first block 653 (FIG. 74). (B) Left-right direction) and the longitudinal direction of the second block 654 are displaced to positions on substantially the same straight line.

As a result, with the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 can be displaced to increase the amount of light incident from the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620. can. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased, and the pattern or pattern of the projection plate member 5620 can be clearly displayed.

Further, since the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 can be displaced according to the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the amount of light emitted from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620 can be measured. Can be changed. That is, the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 can be changed. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to have an interest.

Here, when the projection plate member is displaced, the displacement is such that the light amount of the projection plate member is kept constant by lighting the LED arranged at another position according to the displacement. Along with this, it is necessary to control whether the LED is turned on or off, and the more complicated the displacement of the projection plate member, the more complicated the LED control becomes, and there is a problem that the reliability of the product is lowered. Further, there is a problem that the product cost increases because the LED is arranged at another position.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, since the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can be displaced according to the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the position of the projection plate member 5620 is detected and arranged at another position. Since it is not necessary to control the LED to be turned on or off, the control of the LED 651 can be simplified, the reliability of the product can be improved, and the product cost can be suppressed from increasing.

Further, in order to irradiate the displaced irradiated object (projection plate member) with light, if a plurality of fixed irradiated objects (LEDs) are arranged around the irradiated object, the irradiation range of each irradiated object is There is a problem that a part with a weak amount of light is formed between the two, and when the irradiated body is displaced, light and darkness is created, which lowers the interest of the player. Here, it is conceivable to solve the above-mentioned problem by narrowing the arrangement interval of the irradiating bodies, but in this case, the problem is that the product cost increases because the number of irradiating bodies to be arranged increases. There was a point.

However, in the fifth embodiment, since the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can be displaced with the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can be made to follow the displacement operation of the projection plate member 5620. Therefore, the projection plate member 5620 can always be stably projected regardless of its displacement position. As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of light and darkness due to the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, and to prevent the player's interest from being impaired. Further, since it is not necessary to increase the number of LEDs 651 arranged, it is possible to suppress an increase in product cost.

Further, as described above, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 can be changed by the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, so that the driving force of the drive motor 661 can be applied to the projection plate member 5620. It can be used for both the drive for sliding displacement and the drive for rotating the second block 654, and it is not necessary to newly provide a drive means for displacementing the second block 654. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cost of the product from increasing.

Further, since the irradiation unit 650 is formed by the base member 652 formed of an elastically deformable material and the blocks 653 and 654, it is not necessary to form the displaceable second block 654 as a separate member. Therefore, since the irradiation unit 650 assembled as a unit can be arranged on the front base by connecting the wiring after arranging the irradiation unit 650 on the front base 5612, the process at the time of assembling can be simplified.

On the other hand, when the second state is displaced to the first state, the rack 5627 is displaced to the center position in the left-right direction of the central opening portion 5612h by reversing the drive of the drive motor 661. Therefore, the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is also slid and displaced in the same manner to form the first state.

In this case, the rotating member 5670 on the side (left side in FIG. 74 (b)) whose one end is pushed up by the displacement to the second state is a projection plate by an urging spring (not shown) interposed between the rotating member 5670 and the front base 5612. As the member 5620 slides and displaces to the center position in the left-right direction, one end side of the front view L-shape of the rotating member 5670 is pushed downward and rotated around the shaft portion 5612k. Further, as described above, the rotating member 5670 that is displaced downward is brought into contact with the displacement regulating projection 5612j, so that the rotation range thereof is restricted.

As described above, the displacement from the first state to the third state shown in FIGS. 7 and 8 is detailed because the displacement operation from the first state to the second state and the displacement direction are simply reversed left and right. The explanation is omitted. The third state is a state in which the projection plate member 5620 is arranged on the left side of the front view with respect to the central opening portion 5612h (see FIGS. 75 (b) and 76 (b)).

Next, the projection unit 6600 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80. In the first embodiment, the case where the entire central portion of the projection plate member 620 is always visible to the player has been described, but in the sixth embodiment, the projection plate member 6620 is partially visible to the player. Arranged as possible.

First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 77 is a front view of the projection unit 6600 according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 78 is a front exploded perspective view of the projection unit 6600. FIG. 79 is a rear view of the front base 6612 in a state where the front base 6612 and the irradiation unit 650 are assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the projection unit 6600 is a projection plate member that is partially visibly arranged from a base member 6610 formed in a front view annular shape and an opening formed in the base member 6610. The 6620, the irradiation unit 650 for incident light from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 6620, the drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 6620, and the driving force of the drive motor 661 are transmitted to the projection plate member 6620. It is mainly provided with a gear train (gears 662 to 664) for the purpose.

The base member 6610 includes a ring-shaped back base 611 and an annular front base 6612 arranged in front of the back base 611, and is formed on the facing space between the back base 611 and the front base 6612. The projection plate member 6620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (662 to 664) are housed in the internal space.

The front base 6612 has an opening in which a front view annular-shaped shielding member 6612r is formed on the inner edge of the annular-shaped front base 612 of the first embodiment, and a part of the shielding member 6612r opens in a fan shape in the front-rear direction. The portion 6612p is formed.

The opening 6612p is an opening for making the projection plate member 6620 arranged on the back surface visible from the opening, and is formed in a fan shape centered on the axis of the front base 6612 formed in an annular shape in the front view. It is formed with a length of about 1/6 of the entire circumference of the shielding member 6612r, and is formed on the right side when viewed from the front.

The irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the back surface of the front base 6612 in the area between the intermediate standing portion 612b and the outer standing portion 612c at the outer edge of the opening 6612p, and the back base 611 is mounted on the back surface of the front base 612. By superimposing the front surfaces of the two bases, they are accommodated between the facing surfaces (internal space) of both bases 611 and 612.

The projection plate member 6620 is formed in a front view annular shape, and its inner diameter is formed to be larger than the inner diameter of the annular front base 6612. Further, the projection plate member 6620 is arranged coaxially with the axis of the front base 6612. Therefore, in the assembled state of the projection unit 6600, the inner edge portion of the projection plate member 6620 is arranged so as not to be visible to the player.

Further, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 arranged on the projection plate member 6620 are arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612 (shielding member 612r)). Since it is provided), it can be difficult for the player to see it, and it is possible to prevent the appearance from being deteriorated by that amount.

The projection plate member 6620 is made of a light-transmitting material, transmits the display of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface side, and is visible to the player through the opening 6612p of the front base 6612. When the light emitted from the irradiation unit 650 is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in the form of a pattern or a pattern to form a front base 6612. It is made visible to the player through the opening 6612p of. That is, a pattern or a pattern can be made to appear (display) in the internal space of the opening 6612p of the front base 6612.

Further, the projection plate member 6620 includes a reflecting portion 6622 that diffusely reflects light inside the projection plate member 6620. The reflection portion 6622 is a portion whose inside is roughened by laser processing or the like, and a plurality of patterns, patterns, etc. are formed in the circumferential direction of the projection plate member 6620 over the entire area of the projection plate member 6620 in the front view. To. In this embodiment, the shape of the pattern or pattern of the reflective portion 6622 is formed by dividing it into six in the circumferential direction, and the reflection areas 6622a to 6622f of the six forms of the pattern or pattern are formed (see FIG. 80). ..

Further, in the projection plate member 6620, a gear member 630 and a groove forming member 640 are arranged on the outer peripheral edge portion on the back surface side and the front surface side, respectively. As a result, as in the first embodiment, the driving force of the drive motor 661 is transmitted to the gear member 630 via the gear train (662 to 664), so that the projection plate member 6620 can be rotated.

Next, the operation of the projection unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIG. 80. 80 (a) to 80 (c) are rear views of the projection unit 6600. It should be noted that FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (c) show the transition state of the projection plate member 6620. Further, in FIG. 80, a state in which the back surface base 611 is removed is shown. Further, the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 and the reflection portion 6622 (reflection regions 6622a to 6622f) of the projection plate member 6620 are shown by chain lines.

As shown in FIG. 80A, when the projection plate member 6620 is arranged at the initial position, the projection plate member 6620 is inside the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 in the front view (viewing from the back of the paper to the front). The reflection region 6622a is arranged. Therefore, when the light of the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 is incident from the outer edge portion of the projection plate member 6620, the pattern or pattern of the reflection region 6622a can be displayed inside the opening 6612p. That is, the player can visually recognize the patterns and patterns that emerge inside the opening 6612p.

In this case, the light of the LED 651 is also irradiated to the reflection regions 6622b and 6622f adjacent to the reflection region 6622a, but since the front base 6612 is arranged in front of the reflection regions 6622b and 6622f, the player reflects the light. The display of the areas 6622b and 6622f cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, by displaying the pattern or pattern of the projection plate member 6620 through the opening 6612p, the player does not see the display other than the display surface, and the other areas can be seen, which impairs the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 80 (b) and 80 (c), when a driving force is applied to the drive motor 661, the driving force is projected via the gear train (gears 662 to 664) as described above. The projection plate member 6620 is rotated by being transmitted to the plate member. By rotating the projection plate member 6620, the patterns and patterns of the reflection regions 6622a to 6622f arranged inside the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 in the front view are switched. This makes it possible to display a plurality of different patterns or patterns inside the opening 6612p.

Here, if a pattern or a pattern is printed on the front surface of the irradiated body (projection plate member 6620) to displace the irradiated body and switch the display surface thereof, the visible region (opening portion) of the irradiated body is switched. From 6612p), the pattern or pattern switching of the irradiated body can be seen, and the player can know which display will be displayed next before the pattern or pattern switching is completed, so that the player can see the switching of the irradiated body. There was a problem that the displacement could not be enjoyed to the end.

Further, even if the power of the light source (LED651) that irradiates the irradiated object with light is turned off to darken the display surface of the irradiated object, the irradiated object is affected by the light of another device or a fluorescent lamp in the store. By being irradiated, the pattern and pattern of the irradiated body could be visually recognized by the player.

In the present application, the projection plate member 6620 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and by turning off the light of the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650, the pattern or pattern of the projection plate member 6620 is made difficult to see and becomes transparent. be able to. Therefore, by turning off the irradiation of the LED 651 when rotating the projection plate member 6620, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the pattern or pattern switching of the projection plate member 6620. The displacement of 6620 can be enjoyed to the end.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, since the projection plate member 6620 is formed in an annular shape in the front view and is rotated around the center thereof, the projection plate member 6620 is slide-displaced as compared with the case where the projection plate member 6620 is slide-displaced. The space required for arranging the projection plate member 6620 can be suppressed while ensuring the number of patterns and patterns to be visually recognized by the player through the opening 6612p of the 6612.

That is, if the projection plate member 6620 is slidably displaced, the arrangement space in the left-right or vertical direction is limited, so that it is difficult to secure the pattern and the number of the projection plate member 6620 on the drawing side. By forming the projection plate member 6620, the space required for arranging the projection plate member 6620 can be suppressed while securing the number of patterns and patterns.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining a part or all of one embodiment with a part or all of another one or a plurality of other embodiments.

In the first and second embodiments, the case where a total of four first block 653 and second block 654 are arranged on the substrate member 652 in the irradiation unit 650 of the projection unit 600 has been described, but it is not always the case. The total number of the first block 653 and the second block 654 may be 3 or less, and may be 5 or more. In this case, the ratio of the first block 653 and the second block 654 is arbitrary, and may be only the first block 653 or only the second block 654.

In the first and second embodiments, the case where the LED 651 is arranged on the front surface of the substrate member 652 and the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back surface is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the LED 651, the first block 653, and the second block 654 may be arranged in front of the substrate member 652. In this case, the LED 651 is housed inside the first block 653 and the second block 654, and the light emitted from the LED 651 is projected from the opening formed in the front of the first block 653 and the second block 654. It is incident on the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620.

In the first and second embodiments, the case where the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 of the projection unit 600 are formed of a light transmissive material has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gear member is not necessarily limited to this. The 630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640 may be formed of two layers of a light transmitting material and a non-transmitting material.

For example, the back surface portion 632 side of the gear member 630 and the front surface portion 642 side of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are formed of a layer of a non-transparent material, and the projection plate members 620 and 2620 sides of the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are formed. It may be formed of a layer of permeable material. In this case, the layer of the non-transparent material can prevent the light emitted by other devices in the gaming region from incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620. That is, the light emitted by a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by a layer of a non-transparent material.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when light is not incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and the pattern or pattern is not displayed on the front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620), the pattern or pattern is not displayed from another device. It is possible to prevent light from being incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and displaying a pattern or a pattern on the front surface of the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

Further, in this case, the layer formed of the non-permeable material is formed of a highly reflective metal material or a flexible material, or is between the layer of the non-permeable material and the layer of the transparent material. It is preferable to interpose a metallic material or a flexible material having a high reflectance. As a result, the light incident on the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 from the LED 651 can be more easily reflected on the projection plate members 620 and 2620. As a result, the light reflected by the reflecting unit 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 can be strengthened, and the pattern or pattern can be clearly highlighted.

In the first and second embodiments, the case where the back surface portion 632 of the gear member 630 of the projection unit 600 and the front surface portion 642 of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are in contact with air (atmosphere) has been described, but this is not always the case. For example, a seal of a member having a higher reflectance than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 (for example, silver leaf or aluminum) is attached to the rear view 632 and the front portion 642, or a color having a high reflectance is attached. Printing (for example, white color) may be performed.

In this case, the sticker or printing can prevent the light emitted by other devices in the game area from incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620. That is, the light emitted by a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by a sticker or printing.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when light is not incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and the pattern or pattern is not displayed on the front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620), the pattern or pattern is not displayed from another device. It is possible to prevent light from being incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and displaying a pattern or a pattern on the front surface of the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

Further, by sealing or printing, the light incident on the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640, 2640 from the LED 651 can be more easily reflected on the projection plate members 620, 2620. As a result, the light reflected by the reflecting unit 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 can be strengthened, and the pattern or pattern can be clearly highlighted.

When a seal is attached, the seal may be attached so as to protrude toward the outer edge side from the back surface portion 632 of the gear member 630 and the front surface portion 642 of the groove forming members 640 and 2640. In this case, since the light emitted from the LED 651 and spreading in a fan shape can be reflected by the protruding seal portion, the light emitted from the LED 651 can be easily focused on the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

In the third embodiment, the case where an air layer is formed between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, a plate member made of a non-transparent material having a higher reflectance than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 is provided between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620. It may be installed.

In this case, the light incident on the projection plate member 3620 is surely totally reflected by the plate member made of a non-transmissive material having high reflectance, and can be advanced from the edge portion of the projection plate member 3620 toward the center side. can. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the intensity (light amount) of the light irradiated to the irradiation angle α3, and to strengthen the light reflected by the reflecting unit 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 3620. Patterns and patterns can be clearly highlighted.

Further, the plate member made of a non-transmissive material having high reflectance can suppress the light emitted by other devices in the game region from being incident on the projection plate member 3620. That is, the light emitted by a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by a plate member made of a non-transmissive material having high reflectance.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when the light is not incident on the projection plate member 3620 and the pattern or pattern is not displayed on the front of the projection plate member 3620), the light from other devices is emitted from the projection plate. It is possible to prevent the pattern or pattern from being displayed on the front surface of the projection plate member 3620 by being incident on the member 3620.

In the first embodiment, the case where the means for urging the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 is a coil spring has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a rubber-like elastic body, a torsion spring, or the like. It may be a leaf spring. As the mounting method, a mode in which the protrusion 852 and the protrusion 823 are connected and mounted, or a mode in which the protrusion 850 is mounted between the rotation shaft of the displacement member 850 and the shaft support portion 821 of the base member 820 is exemplified.

In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 is rotationally moved around the shaft hole 851 formed at one end is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the displacement member. The 850 may be a slide displacement of the guide groove formed in the front base 820. In this case, if both ends of the guide groove of the front base 820 are formed at different positions in the vertical direction (gravity direction), the displacement member 850 is displaced in the gravity direction as in the first embodiment. Since it can be a normal projection motion of a constant velocity circular motion and the displacement velocity can be changed, it is possible to make the displacement member 850 perform an interesting displacement.

In the first to third and sixth embodiments, the case where the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged at a position facing the side end surface of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be arranged at a position facing the side end surfaces of the gear members 630, 3630 or the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640.

Also in this case, similarly to the first to third, fifth and sixth embodiments, the light of the LED 651 is incident from the side end faces of the gear members 630, 3630 or the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640, and the projection plate is projected. A pattern or pattern can be displayed on the surface of the members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620.

Further, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is not opposed to the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 (that is, the light irradiation of the LED 651). One of the light emitted by the LED 651 by arranging the surface on the projection plate member 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear member 630, 3630 and the side end surface of the groove forming member 640, 2640, 3640). The portions may be arranged so as to be incident on the side end faces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640.

In this case, the light emitted in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is irradiated obliquely from the irradiation surface of the LED 651 while irradiating another non-irradiation member different from the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620. A part of the light can be incident on the side end faces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640. That is, the LED 651 can be made to use both the light for displaying a pattern or a pattern on the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 and the light for irradiating another irradiated object.

In the first to third, fifth and sixth embodiments described above, the case where the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 and the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620 and 6620 are arranged in parallel has been described. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be tilted with respect to the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620.

Specifically, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged toward the back surface side, and the light emitted in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 at the arrangement position of the LED 651 is the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620. , 6620 may be a position to be irradiated on the side end face. In this case, when a pattern or a pattern is displayed on the surface of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the light of the LED 651 leaks from the inner edge of the front base 612, 6612 formed in the front view annular shape. Can be suppressed.

Further, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged toward the front side, and the light emitted in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 at the arrangement position of the LED 651 is the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620. It may be a position where the side end surface is irradiated.

Further, the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged so as to be tilted with respect to the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 toward the back side or the front side, and the arrangement position of the LED 651 is set to the LED 651. The position may be such that the light emitted in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the groove forming member 640, 2640, 3640 is irradiated to the side end surface of the groove forming member 640, 2640, 3640 or the side end surface of the gear member 630, 3630.

In addition, the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged so as to be tilted with respect to the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 toward the back side or the front side, and the arrangement position of the LED 651 is arranged. The light emitted in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be the position where the front portion 632 of the groove forming member 640, 2640, 3640 or the back portion 632 of the gear member 630, 3630 is irradiated.

In the fifth embodiment, the light emitted from the LED 651 arranged on the front surface of the second block 654 is incident on the projection plate member 5620 from the left and right side surfaces of the projection plate member 5620 from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620. The case of increasing the amount of emitted light has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 by the light incident from the left and right sides of the projection plate member 5620 can be displayed on the projection plate member. The pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 may be different from the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 due to the light incident from the upper end surface of the 5620.

That is, the upper end of the projection plate member 5620 is formed by forming an air layer or a non-light-transmitting material inside the projection plate member 5620 and dividing the region of the reflection portion 622 (for example, dividing into three regions). The light incident from the portion is emitted from the front side by the reflection portion 622 in the first region, and the light incident from the left side surface is emitted from the front side by the reflection portion 622 in the second region, and is emitted from the right side surface. The incident light can be in a state of being emitted from the front side by the reflecting portion 622 in the third region. As a result, it is possible to form a plurality of patterns and patterns of patterns displayed on the projection plate member 5620, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

In this case, a plurality of light sources (LED651) for irradiating the first to third regions are provided around the irradiated body (projection plate member 5620), and the first to third regions are irradiated (for example, on the upper portion). The arranged light source incidents light from the upper end to irradiate the first region, the light source arranged on the left side incidents from the left end surface and irradiates the second region, and the light source arranged on the right side illuminates the right end. Although it is possible to irradiate the third region by injecting light from a surface), there is a problem that a plurality of light sources need to be arranged and the product cost increases.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 is rotated with respect to the first block 653 due to the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, so that the second block Since the irradiation direction of the light of the LED 651 arranged in front can be changed, it is possible to irradiate two areas, one is to irradiate the second or third region and the other is to irradiate the first region. Therefore, the number of LEDs 651 to be arranged can be reduced by that amount, and it is possible to suppress an increase in product cost.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the irradiation direction of the light of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 is changed according to the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the rotating member 5670 may be connected to the shaft portion of the newly disposed drive motor and rotated.

In this case, since the rotating member 5670 can be rotated regardless of the slide position of the projection plate member 5620 to change the irradiation direction of the light of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654, the projection plate member 5620 can be changed. The amount of light emitted from the front of the can be partially increased or decreased. That is, the direction of the light incident on the projection plate member 5620 can be displaced to change the shade of the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620.

In the first embodiment, a projection plate member 620, a plurality of irradiation units 650 that irradiate the projection plate member 620, and a gear that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 661 are provided between the facing surfaces of the front base 612 and the rear base 611. The case where the rows (gears 662 to 664) are arranged as one unit has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned unit (projection) is provided between the facing surfaces of the front base 612 and the rear base 611. The plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear trains (gears 662 to 664) may be arranged in such a manner that two or more are stacked in the front-rear direction.

In this case, by displaying the pattern or pattern on each projection plate member 620, the player can visually recognize the display of the pattern or pattern on each projection plate member 620 in combination. As a result, by changing the rotation position of each projection plate member 620, it is possible to form a plurality of patterns and display patterns of the patterns, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest from being impaired.

In the first embodiment, the case where the projection plate member 620 is rotationally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the projection plate member 620 may be fixed and the irradiation unit 650 may be displaced. ..

In the third embodiment, the case where the light of the LED 651 is not incident on the center side from the side end portion of the projection plate member 3620 at the position where the bolt T is arranged has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the bolt T may be formed of a metal material (for example, iron or stainless steel) and the light projected on the side surface thereof may be reflected to the center side of the projection plate member 3620. In this case, the light emitted from the LED 651 can be easily collected in the central portion of the projection plate member 3620.

Further, a plurality of bolts T are arranged at regular intervals, and a portion where a pattern or a pattern is not displayed (the light of the LED 651 is not incident) is partially formed on the surface of the projection plate member 3620 to form a portion of the projection plate member 3620. The display may be separated.

Further, as described above, since the ground contact surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is a surface that radially overlaps the opening 646 (see FIG. 65 (c)), it is usually used. A place where light is not incident can be a ground plane.

That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646, when light is incident from the radial outside of the opening 646, the light is blocked by the bolt T and the light of the LED 651 is not incident on the reflecting portion 622 side. Therefore, it is possible to reliably suppress that the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from the LED 651 is incident on the projection plate member 3620 side.

In this case, by displacing the irradiation unit 650 while irradiating the light of the LED 651 arranged on the irradiation unit 650, the player can visually recognize that the projection plate member 620 is displaced (rotated). ..

The displacement of the irradiation unit 650 in this case may be a slide displacement or a rotational displacement, and the irradiation directions of the LEDs 651 arranged in the first block 653 and the second block 654 are displaced in different directions. It may be a thing.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple hits (for example, two or three times) including it occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Concept of the invention using the projection plate member 620 of the projection unit 600 as an example>
It is provided with a light transmitting member formed from a light transmitting material in a plate shape and having a reflecting portion, and a light irradiating means for irradiating the side end surface of the light transmitting member with light, and is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. In a gaming machine in which the light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member, the ratio of the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member to the light emitted from the light irradiating means is high. The gaming machine A1 is provided with an emission increasing means for increasing emission, and the emission increasing means is arranged outside the display area.

Here, a light transmitting member formed from a light transmitting material in a plate shape and having a reflecting portion, and a light irradiating means for irradiating the side end surface of the light transmitting member with light are provided from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. A gaming machine is known in which incident light is reflected by a reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of a light transmitting member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-29735). According to this type of gaming machine, for example, by disposing a light transmitting member on the front side of the liquid crystal display device in the game area, the player can display the liquid crystal display device via the light transmitting member in a normal state. On the other hand, when a predetermined gaming state is formed, the light emitted from the light irradiating means is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, and the light traveling inside the light transmitting member is reflected by the reflecting portion. Then, it is emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, a plurality of groups composed of a plurality of reflecting surfaces are arranged in the reflecting portion, and each group forms a pattern or a pattern. Therefore, the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be recognized by the player as a pattern or a pattern. That is, along with the display of the liquid crystal display device, a pattern or a pattern can be made to appear (display) on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device.

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member is weak. Therefore, it becomes difficult to clearly show (display) a pattern or a pattern. In this case, if the output of the light irradiation means is increased, not only the cost and power consumption are increased, but also the amount of heat generated is increased, which causes a problem that heat affects other members and devices.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the emission increasing means for increasing the ratio of the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member to the light emitted from the light irradiating means is provided, the light reflected by the reflecting portion is provided. The light emitted from the front of the transmissive member can be strengthened. As a result, patterns and patterns can be clearly highlighted (displayed). Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the calorific value can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and devices can be suppressed. Further, since the emission increasing means is arranged outside the display area, it can be difficult for the player to see it, and it is possible to suppress deterioration of the appearance by that amount.

The position of forming the reflective portion of the light transmitting member may be, for example, the back surface of the light transmitting member or the inside of the light transmitting member.

In the gaming machine A1, the emission increasing means includes an outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A2, since the emission increasing means includes an outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light emitting means irradiates the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Not only the light that reaches directly but also the light that is emitted from the light irradiating means and reflected by the outer edge member can be incidented from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, and the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member by that amount can be incident. The light collection efficiency can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the light that reaches the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member among the light emitted from the light irradiating means, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened. , Patterns and patterns can be clearly highlighted (displayed). Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the calorific value can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and devices can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, when the emission increasing means includes the outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, the other device in the game area emits light. Can prevent the outer edge member from blocking the light of the other device and incident light from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiating means is turned off (when the light is not incident on the light transmitting member and the pattern or pattern is not displayed on the front of the light transmitting member), the light from another device is incident on the light transmitting member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pattern or pattern from being displayed on the front of the light transmitting member.

In the gaming machine A2, the gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the outer edge member is arranged on each of the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2, the outer edge members are arranged on the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, respectively. The light that is not directly incident on the side end surface and that deviates to the front side of the light transmitting member and the light that deviates to the back side are reflected by the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, respectively, and incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. be able to. Therefore, the light collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be further improved by that amount.

Further, by providing the outer edge member on each of the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member in this way, even if the light emitted by another device in the gaming area arrives from either the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member. Since it can be blocked by each of the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, it is possible to suppress the incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiating means is turned off (when the light is not incident on the light transmitting member and the pattern or pattern is not displayed on the front of the light transmitting member), the light from another device is incident on the light transmitting member. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably suppress the display of patterns and patterns on the front surface of the light transmitting member.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the outer edge member is arranged so as to project outward from the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2 or A3, the outer edge member is arranged so as to project outward from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, so that the light emitted from the light irradiating means can be emitted. , It is possible to reflect the light at the overhanging portion of the outer edge member (the surface connected to the side end surface of the light transmitting member) so that the light can be easily incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the light collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be further improved by that amount.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the outer edge member is formed of a material having a refractive index smaller than that of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A5, in any of the effects of the game machines A2 to A4, the outer edge member is formed of a material having a refractive index smaller than that of the light transmitting member, and thus is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Light can be easily reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reached to the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened to make the pattern or pattern clear. It can be highlighted (displayed).

That is, for example, when the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are formed of a material having the same refractive index, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is less likely to be reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. It is easily transmitted to the outer edge member. The light transmitted to the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) on the outer surface (boundary with air) of the outer edge portion and then returned to the light transmitting member, but the light returned from the outer edge member to the light transmitting member. Includes not only those traveling in the direction toward the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member but also those traveling in the direction toward the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the light that reaches the reflecting portion is reduced. On the other hand, like the game machine A4, by forming the outer edge member from a material having a refractive index smaller than that of the light transmitting member, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be collected from the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. Since it can be easily reflected (or can be totally reflected) at the boundary with and, it is possible to secure the light that reaches the reflecting portion.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the outer edge member is arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A6, in the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A5, the outer edge member is arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member. Light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reflected by the front surface or the back surface (boundary with air) of the light transmitting member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reached to the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened to make the pattern or pattern clear. It can be highlighted (displayed).

That is, for example, when the refractive index of the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are the same or the difference in the refractive index is relatively small, if the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are in close contact with each other, the side end surface of the light transmitting member The incident light is less likely to be reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member, and is easily transmitted to the outer edge member. The light transmitted to the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) on the outer surface (boundary with air) of the outer edge portion and then returned to the light transmitting member, but the light returned from the outer edge member to the light transmitting member. Includes not only those traveling in the direction toward the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member but also those traveling in the direction toward the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the light that reaches the reflecting portion is reduced. On the other hand, like the game machine A5, by arranging the outer edge member in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Since the light can be easily reflected (or can be totally reflected) on the front surface or the back surface (boundary with air) of the light transmitting member, the light reaching the reflecting portion can be secured.

In any of the game machines A2 to A6, a rotation mechanism for rotatably supporting the light transmitting member and applying a rotational driving force to the light transmitting member is provided, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. , A curved rack gear is engraved along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the annular shape, and the rotation mechanism rotationally drives a pinion gear meshed with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member and the pinion gear. A game machine A7 characterized by being provided with a driving means.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape and along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the annular shape. A curved rack gear is engraved, and the rotation mechanism includes a pinion gear meshed with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member and a drive means for rotationally driving the pinion gear. The rotation of the pinion gear can be transmitted to the outer edge member via the curved rack gear, whereby the light transmitting member can be rotated together with the outer edge member. Therefore, the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be visually recognized by the player in a displaced (rotated) state.

In this case, the outer edge member has both the role of condensing the light emitted from the light irradiating means on the side end surface of the light transmitting member and the role of transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the light transmitting member to rotate the light. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts by that amount, reduce the product cost, and improve the reliability due to the simplification of the structure.

In any of the game machines A2 to A7, the light transmitting member is rotatably supported and a rotation mechanism for applying a rotational driving force to the light transmitting member is provided, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that a guide groove is recessed along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface of the annular shape, and the rotation mechanism includes a plurality of support rings guided along the guide groove.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A7, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape, and the guide groove is formed along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface of the annular shape. Since the rotating mechanism is recessed and includes a plurality of support rings guided along the guide groove, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is exposed by the action of the guide groove and the support ring, that is, light. The light transmitting member can be rotatably supported in a state where light can be incident from the side end surface of the transmitting member. Therefore, by rotating the light transmitting member, the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be visually recognized by the player in a displaced (rotated) state.

In this case, the outer edge member can have both the role of condensing the light emitted from the light irradiating means on the side end surface of the light transmitting member and the role of rotatably supporting the light transmitting member together with the support ring. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, the product cost can be reduced, and the reliability can be improved by simplifying the structure.

The support ring may be rotatably pivotally supported, or may be non-rotatably fixed. In this case, as the form in which the support ring is guided along the guide groove, the support ring rotatably supported by the shaft rolls along the guide groove or rolls while sliding, or becomes non-rotatable. An example is a mode in which a fixed support ring slides along a guide groove.

Further, in the gaming machine A8 which is subordinate to the gaming machine A7, the outer edge member in which the curved rack gear is engraved is on either the front or the back surface of the light transmitting member, and the outer edge member in which the guide groove is recessed is the light transmitting member. It is preferable to dispose of them on the other side of the front surface or the back surface, respectively. That is, by disposing the outer edge member on the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light radiated from the light irradiating means is not directly incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member, and the front surface of the light transmitting member. This is because the light that deviates to the side and the light that deviates to the back side can be reflected by the outer edge member on the front surface and the outer edge member on the back surface, respectively, and incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Further, by disposing the outer edge member on the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member in this way, the light emitted by the other device in the game area reaches from either the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member. Even in this case, it can be blocked by each of the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, and it is possible to suppress the incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

In the gaming machine A8, the outer peripheral side of the outer edge member is formed so as to face the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member at a predetermined interval, and the facing space between the outer edge member and the light transmitting member is the guide. A gaming machine A9 characterized by being a groove.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A8, the outer peripheral side thereof is formed in a shape in which the outer peripheral side thereof faces the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member at a predetermined interval, and the outer edge member and the light transmitting member are formed. Since the space opposite to the guide groove is used as a guide groove, it is possible to reduce the size of the structure composed of the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. That is, by supporting one inner wall of the guide groove on the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, it is not necessary to form the outer edge member in a U-shaped cross section, and the thickness dimension of the outer edge member can be reduced. Therefore, the size of the above-mentioned structure can be reduced accordingly.

Further, since the outer edge member is arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is directed to the front surface of the light transmitting member. Alternatively, it can be easily reflected on the back surface (boundary with air). As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reached to the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened to make the pattern or pattern clear. It can be highlighted (displayed).

In any of the game machines A2 to A9, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is formed orthogonal to the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiating means has a direction of irradiating light from the irradiating surface. The gaming machine A10 is characterized in that the irradiation surface is arranged so as to face the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a posture orthogonal to the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A9, the side end faces of the light transmitting member are formed orthogonal to the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiating means thereof irradiates the light transmitting member. Since the irradiation surface is arranged so as to face the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a posture in which the irradiation direction of light from the surface is orthogonal to the side end surface of the light transmitting member, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is irradiated from the light irradiation means. The light incident from the light can be easily reflected by the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reached to the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened to make the pattern or pattern clear. It can be highlighted (displayed).

<Concept of the invention using the irradiation unit 650 of the projection unit 600 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a target member to be irradiated with light and a plurality of light emitting means dispersedly arranged around the target member in a posture in which each of the target members faces an irradiation surface, the plurality of light emitting means. It is provided with one or a plurality of substrate members on which at least two or more of the light emitting means are mounted and elastically deformable, and a base member that holds the substrate member in a predetermined elastically deformed posture. Characteristic gaming machine B1.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a target member to be irradiated with light and a plurality of light emitting means arranged in such a posture that each of the target members faces an irradiation surface (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015). -29735 (publication). According to this gaming machine, by irradiating light from a light emitting means and incident light from the outer peripheral surface of the target member, the incident light is advanced inside the light transmitting member and reflected by a reflecting portion. It can be emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, the applicant of the present application forms the target member in a disk shape from a light transmissive material and forms a reflective portion, while irradiating a plurality of light emitting means on the outer peripheral surface of the disk shape (target member). We devised a structure in which the light emitted from each light emitting means is incident from the outer peripheral surface of the target member (not known at the time of filing the present application).

However, it has been newly found that in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since it is necessary to dispose a plurality of light emitting means around the target member, there is a problem that the disposition work is troublesome. In particular, since it is necessary to dispose of the plurality of light emitting means in a posture in which each irradiation surface is directed toward the outer peripheral surface of the target member (that is, each has a different direction), the disposition work is troublesome from this point as well. ..

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, at least two or more light emitting means are mounted and one or a plurality of substrate members formed so as to be elastically deformable, and the substrate members are held in a predetermined elastically deformed posture. By disposing one substrate member on the base member, it is possible to complete the disposing work of at least two or more light emitting means. Therefore, the labor of arranging the light emitting means can be reduced accordingly.

Further, when the substrate member is arranged on the base member, the substrate member is held in a predetermined elastically deformed posture, so that the direction of the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be defined. That is, since it is not necessary to dispose of the plurality of light emitting means in a posture in which their irradiation surfaces are individually directed toward the outer peripheral surface of the target member, the labor of disposing the light emitting means can be suppressed from this point as well.

The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that the gaming machine B1 is provided with a block body which is formed to have higher rigidity than the board member and is arranged on the board member, and the block body is held by the base member.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the block body is formed to have higher rigidity than the board member and is provided on the board member, and the block body is held by the base member. , It is possible to suppress warpage and bending of the substrate member and easily define the posture of the substrate member. As a result, the posture of the light emitting means can be suppressed from being affected by the warp or bending of the substrate member, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be easily maintained.

In the gaming machine B2, the gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the light emitting means is arranged in a region of the substrate member where the block body is arranged.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the light emitting means is arranged in the region where the block body is arranged in the substrate member, so that the posture of the light emitting means is the warp of the substrate member. It is possible to more reliably suppress the influence of bending and bending. Therefore, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the direction can be further easily maintained.

In the gaming machines B2 or B3, a plurality of the block bodies are arranged on the substrate members at predetermined intervals, and the base members are elastically deformed from the substrate members located between the block bodies. A gaming machine B4 characterized by being held by the body.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2 or B3, a plurality of block bodies are arranged on the board members at predetermined intervals, and the board members located between the block bodies are elastically arranged. Since it is held by the base body in a deformed (bent) posture, the posture of the light emitting means (direction of the irradiation surface) is stabilized as compared with the case where the substrate member in the elastically deformed posture is directly held by the base member. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the light emitting means is arranged in front of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is the substrate member on the opposite side to the target member. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being arranged on the back surface.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the light emitting means is arranged in front of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is on the opposite side of the target member. Since it is arranged on the back surface of the substrate member, the light emitting means can be brought closer to the target member while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture of the substrate member by the block body.

In the gaming machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by screws from the front surface of the board member, and the head of the screw is projected to the front surface of the board member.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by screws from the front surface of the substrate member, and the head of the screw protrudes from the front surface of the substrate member, so that the light emitting means can be used. It can be protected by the head of the screw. That is, for example, when the movable member is displaced to the front surface of the substrate member, the head of the screw is brought into contact with the member, and it is possible to prevent the member from being in contact with the light emitting means and being damaged.

In the gaming machine B6, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is arranged between the heads of the two screws.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is arranged between the heads of the two screws. The light emitting means can be easily protected by the head of the screw.

It is preferable that the two screws are arranged along the displacement direction of the movable member. This is because by disposing the light emitting means between the heads of the screws arranged in this way, it is possible to easily bring the movable member into contact with the head of the screw, and it is possible to easily protect the light emitting means.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B7, a protrusion is projected from one of the base body or the block body, and a fitting hole for receiving and fitting the protrusion is formed on the other side of the base body or the block body. A gaming machine B8 characterized by being recessed in.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of either the game machines B2 to B7, a protrusion is projected on one of the base body and the block body, and the protrusion is received and fitted to the one of the base body and the block body. Since the hole is recessed in the other side of the base body or the block body, the block body can be arranged in the base body by fitting the protrusion into the fitting hole, and the labor of the arrangement work can be suppressed. .. In particular, when a plurality of block bodies are arranged on a substrate member and are arranged in an elastically deformed (bent) posture between the block bodies, one of the block bodies is positioned (temporarily fixed) by fitting. ), The substrate member can be elastically deformed (bent) and the other block body can be fitted, so that the workability of the arrangement work can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B8, the block body has a recess on the surface on the side where the board member is disposed, and the electronic component disposed on the substrate member is housed in the recess of the block body. A gaming machine B9 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine B9, in any of the gaming machines B2 to B8, the block body is provided with a recess on the surface on the side where the block body is disposed, and is disposed on the substrate member in the recess of the block body. Since the electronic parts are stored, the electronic parts can be covered and protected by the block body. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent a movable member from coming into contact with an electronic component and being damaged.

<Concept of the invention using the vertical displacement unit 800 as an example>
A game including a base member, a displacement member disposed on the base member and displaceably formed between the first position and the second position, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace it. In the machine, the displacement member includes an elastic member that is elastically deformed as it is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member moves from the first position to the second position by the action of gravity. In a state of being disposed on the base member in a form of being displaced in the direction and the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position. A gaming machine C1 characterized in that the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced.

Here, the base member, the displacement member disposed on the base member and displaceably formed between the first position and the second position, and the driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace it. A gaming machine is known to provide an effect by displacement of a displacement member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is placed in a retracted position (for example, either the first position or the second position) which is invisible to the player or is on the outer edge side of the game area, while a predetermined game. When the state is formed, the displacement member is displaced toward the overhanging position (the other of the first position or the second position) overhanging the game area, and the operation of the displacement member displaced toward the overhanging position is played. The production is performed so that the person can see it. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed, so that it is difficult to make the displacement member perform an interesting displacement. There was a problem that there was.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the displacement member is provided with an elastic member that is elastically deformed as the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member is the first from the first position due to the action of gravity. It is arranged on the base member in a form of being displaced in the direction toward the two positions, and in a state where the driving force is released from the driving means to the displacement member, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position. Since the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member around this equilibrium position (predetermined position). ) Can be performed by the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the displacement member in the gravity direction can be regarded as the normal projection motion of the constant velocity circular motion, and the displacement velocity can be changed, so that the displacement member can be displaced in an interesting manner.

On the other hand, if a driving force is applied from the driving means to the displacement member, the displacement member is displaced between the first position and the second position in a manner different from the above-mentioned displacement (movement of normal projection of constant velocity circular motion). It is possible to increase the variation of displacement accordingly. That is, the variation of displacement can be increased only by switching whether or not the driving force is applied from the driving means to the displacement member, and the structure and control do not need to be complicated, so that the product cost can be reduced and the reliability can be improved. It can be improved.

In the gaming machine C1, the displacement member is characterized in that one end side is rotatably supported by the base member and the other end side is moved up and down between the first position and the second position. Game machine C2.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, one end side is rotatably supported by the base member, and the other end side is moved up and down between the first position and the second position. , When the displacement member is made to perform reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member by releasing the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member. The displacement of the other end of the displacement member can be a displacement that combines not only a linear motion in the vertical direction but also a rotational motion centered on one end side. As a result, it is possible to make such a displacement member perform an interesting displacement.

The gaming machine C2 includes a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and the transmitting means is a rotating member rotatably arranged on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means. The gaming machine C3 is characterized by comprising a connecting member having one end rotatably connected to a position eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member and the other end rotatably connected to the displacement member.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2, the transmission means are rotatably arranged on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the eccentricity from the rotation center of the rotating member. Since one end is connected to the displaced position and the other end is connected to the displacement member, the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released, and the action of gravity and the elastic recovery of the elastic member are provided. When reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) due to force is performed on the displacement member, the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member, and the pushing and pulling causes the rotating member to rotate. Since the posture of the connecting member is changed, the magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member among the forces in the push-pull direction can be changed. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocally displaced, the magnitude of the resistance that the displacement member receives from the transmission means can be changed, and as a result, the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member can be changed. It is possible to make such a displacement member perform an interesting displacement.

In the game machine C3, at the predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, with respect to the direction connecting the rotation center of the rotating member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the directions connecting the connecting positions of the rotating member and the connecting member and the connecting positions of the connecting member and the displacement member are substantially orthogonal to each other.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C3, at a predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the rotation center of the rotating member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member are connected. Since the direction connecting the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member is substantially orthogonal to the direction connecting the and, the direction of rotating the rotating member among the forces in the push-pull direction. The magnitude of the force component can be maximized at the equilibrium position (predetermined position), and the force component can be reduced in any direction of pushing or pulling from the equilibrium position. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocally displaced, the resistance received by the displacement member from the transmission means can be changed substantially symmetrically with respect to the equilibrium position, so that the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member can be easily continued.

In the gaming machine C3 or C4, one of the rotating member or the connecting member includes a projecting portion projecting toward the other, and the predetermined position in the movable range between the first position and the second position. When the displacement member is displaced in the central range including the above, the projecting portion is made non-opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, and the first position or the second position is smaller than the central range. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that when the displacement member is displaced in an outer range close to the above, the projecting portion faces the other of the rotating member or the connecting member so as to be abuttable.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3 or C4, one of the rotating or connecting members comprises a protruding portion that projects towards the other and is between the first and second positions. When the displacement member is displaced in the central side range including the predetermined position in the movable range of the above, the projecting portion is made non-opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, and the first position or the first position from the central side range or When the displacement member is displaced in the outer range close to the second position, the projecting portion faces the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, so that the driving force applied from the driving means to the displacement member is released. , When the displacement member is made to perform reciprocating displacement centered on the equilibrium position (predetermined position), the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member is smoothed by avoiding the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the projecting portion in the central range. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the projecting portion is made to face the other of the rotating member or the connecting member so as to be abuttable in the outer range, and the displacement members are rotated. It is possible to suppress rattling between the member and the connecting member.

In the gaming machine C5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the center side range, and the center side range is set to a range including the predetermined position and the second position. A gaming machine C6 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the central side range, and the central side range includes a predetermined position and a second position. Since it is set in the range, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the posture of the displacement member can be changed by suppressing the rattling between the rotating member and the connecting member by using the projecting portion. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position by the driving force of the driving means, it is possible to avoid the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the projecting portion, which acts on the displacement member. It is possible to smoothly displace the displacement member while also utilizing gravity.

For example, when the first position is the retracted position where the displacement member is retracted to the outer edge side of the game area, and the second position is the overhang position where the displacement member projects toward the center side of the game area. At the first position (retracted position), rattling of the displacement member can be suppressed to improve the appearance and durability, and the effect of other members can be suppressed from being hindered, and the displacement member can be suppressed. Is displaced from the first position to the second position (overhanging position), it can be quickly extended (displaced) to the second position, and the effect of the overhanging operation can be enhanced. ..

In the gaming machine C6, at the second position, the rotation center of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are located substantially in a straight line. The gaming machine C7.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of the game machine C6, at the second position, the rotation center of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are substantially straight. Since it is located on the line, even if the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member, the pushing and pulling direction is toward the center of rotation of the rotating member, and the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member is generated. A state that does not occur (that is, a dead point) can be formed. Therefore, when the displacement member is displaced toward the second position, the second displacement member can be smoothly (quickly) displaced while avoiding the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the projecting portion. After being placed at the position, the action of the dead center described above suppresses the rattling of the displacement member, and the appearance and durability can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines C3 to C7, the connecting member includes a contact portion formed so as to be able to contact the base member, and the contact portion is the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member and the rotation. It is characterized in that it is arranged on a substantially straight line connecting the connecting positions of the member and the connecting member, and is arranged on the side opposite to the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member with the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member interposed therebetween. Game machine C8.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C3 to C7, the connecting member includes a contact portion formed so as to be able to contact the base member, and the contact portion is a displacement member and a base. Since it is on a substantially straight line connecting the connecting position of the member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and is arranged on the opposite side of the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member across the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member. , When the displacement member rattles with respect to the base member, the contact portion of the connecting member is brought into contact with the base member, so that the connecting portion of the rotating member and the connecting member (one end of the rotating member and the connecting member can rotate). It is possible to easily suppress the inclination of the rotating shaft) with respect to the shaft support hole of the portion connected to. As a result, the driving force of the driving means can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member via the transmitting means.

<Concept of the invention using the displacement unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a base member, a displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member, and a drive means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, the drive means are the first drive means and the first drive means. Two driving means are provided, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the second driving means. The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced in a different manner.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a base member, a displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, and performing an effect by displacement of the displacement member. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is placed in a retracted position that is invisible to the player or is on the outer edge side of the game area, while when a predetermined game state is formed, the displacement member is stretched over the game area. The displacement member is displaced toward the protruding position, and the player is made to visually recognize the operation of the displacement member displaced toward the overhanging position.

However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that the effect of the effect due to the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient. Specifically, in the conventional gaming machine, the displacement mode (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one, so the effect of the displacement of the displacement member is one pattern. Therefore, it was difficult to produce a surprising effect for the player. Even if the driving force of the driving means is changed by varying the strength, the displacement speed of the displacement member only increases or decreases, and the displacement mode (trajectory) is still constant. It was difficult to do.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the driving means includes a first driving means and a second driving means, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means. (2) Since the displacement member is displaced in a different manner depending on the case where the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the drive means, the effect of the effect of the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced. That is, unlike the conventional product in which the displacement mode of the displacement member (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited in one way, the effect is not one pattern, and at least two displacement members are used. Since the displacement can be performed according to the displacement mode, the player can perform a surprising effect by switching the displacement mode.

In the gaming machine D1, a first member that is slidably displaceable on the base member and is driven by the first drive means, and a second drive means that is slidably displaceable on the base member. The gaming machine D2 is provided with a second member driven by the displacement member, and the first portion and the second portion of the displacement member are connected to the first member and the second member at least rotatably, respectively. ..

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the first member is displaceably displaced on the base member and is slidably displaceable on the base member and the first member driven by the first driving means. The first and second portions of the displacement member are at least rotatably connected to the first and second members, respectively, with a second member driven by the second drive means. When the first member is slidably displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, it is possible to form a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side, while the second member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means. When the member is slidably displaced, it is possible to form a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the first portion side. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two displacement modes, it is possible to perform a surprising effect of the player by switching the displacement mode.

In particular, according to the game machine D2, the two displacement modes are not formed by making the center of rotation the same and different the direction of rotation, but forming the center of rotation differently and the center of rotation differently. Therefore, the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be made large, and the player can easily perform a surprising effect.

In the gaming machine D2, the first member and the second member are disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a connecting pin protruding from the first portion of the displacement member or one of the first members is provided. A gaming machine D3 characterized in that it is rotatably and slidably inserted into a guide groove formed on the other side.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2, the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and one of the first part or the first member of the displacement member. Since the connecting pin projecting from is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guide groove formed on the other side, the first member is linearly displaced by the driving force of the first driving means or the driving force of the second driving means. A displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side and a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the first portion side are formed depending on whether the second member is linearly displaced. can. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two displacement modes, it is possible to perform a surprising effect of the player by switching the displacement mode.

In this case, since the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, it is not necessary to have a complicated structure as in the case of sliding displacement with a curved locus (with a curved locus). If there is, it is necessary to provide not only a mechanism for guiding the first member and the second member in a curved shape but also a mechanism for continuously applying a driving force to the first member and the second member that are displaced in a curved shape. (Given), for example, a rack pinion mechanism can be utilized and its structure can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the durability and the reliability of operation.

In the gaming machine D3, the gaming machine D4 is characterized in that the direction of the linear displacement of the first member and the direction of the linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel to each other.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of the game machine D3, the direction of the linear displacement of the first member and the direction of the linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel to each other. In addition to the displacement mode in which only one of the driving means is driven to rotate the entire displacement member, the displacement in which both the first driving means and the second driving means are driven to linearly displace (for example, traverse) the entire displacement member. Aspects can be formed. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least three different displacement modes, it is possible to easily perform a surprising effect of the player by switching such displacement modes.

In particular, according to the game machine D4, as the displacement mode of the displacement member, the type of displacement (rotation) is the same, but the type of displacement itself is different in addition to the one that makes the direction of rotation different from the position of the center of rotation. (That is, rotation and linear displacement can be formed), so that the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be further increased, and it is possible to further facilitate the surprising effect of the player.

In the gaming machine D4, when the first member and the second member are driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, respectively, the displacement speed of the first member and the displacement speed of the second member are different. A gaming machine D5 characterized by being speed.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D4, when the first member and the second member are driven by the first drive means and the second drive means, respectively, the displacement speed of the first member and the second member. Since the displacement velocity is different from the displacement velocity of the member, the displacement of the displacement member can include the rotational motion and the linear motion. That is, the displacement member can be not only displaced (linear motion) in parallel with the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the second member while maintaining its posture, but can also be linearly moved while rotating its posture. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to perform a surprising effect.

It should be noted that it is impossible to displace the displacement member in a displacement mode that combines such rotational motion and linear motion with the conventional configuration in which the displacement member is slid along the slide groove by the driving force of one driving means. , It is possible for the first time to use the driving means of 2 as in the present invention.

In any of the game machines D1 to D5, a second displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member is provided, and when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, the displacement thereof. The second displacement member is displaced together with the member, while the second displacement member is maintained in a stopped state when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means. Amusement machine D6.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D5, a second displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member is provided, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first driving means. When the displacement member is displaced, the second displacement member is displaced together with the displacement member, while when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means, the second displacement member is maintained in the stopped state. , The device (change) between the displacement mode by the first drive means and the displacement mode by the second drive means can be increased. Therefore, by switching such a displacement mode, it is possible to easily perform a surprising effect of the player.

<Concept of the invention using the projection unit 5600 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a target member to be irradiated with light and a light irradiating means for irradiating the target member with light, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiating means is formed displaceably. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the irradiation mode of the target member by the light irradiation means is changed by the displacement of one or both of the above.

Here, a game in which a displacement member displaceably formed between the first position and the second position and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace the displacement member are provided, and the effect is produced by the displacement of the displacement member. The machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this gaming machine, a light irradiation means (LED) is arranged inside the displacement member, and a translucent portion made of a light transmissive material is provided on the front surface (the surface on the player side) of the displacement member, and the translucency thereof is provided. By irradiating the light portion from the back surface with the light irradiating means, the player can visually recognize the form in which a part of the displacement member (translucent portion) is emitting light. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the irradiation mode of the target member is constant by the light irradiation means, there is a problem that there is little change in the mode visually recognized by the player, and it is difficult to have a hobby.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiation means are formed so as to be displaceable, and the displacement of one or both changes the irradiation mode of the target member by the light irradiation means. It is possible to change the mode in which the player visually recognizes. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to have an interest.

As the form in which the light irradiation mode is changed, for example, the position of the target member irradiated by the light irradiation means is changed, and the distance from the irradiation surface of the light irradiation means to the irradiation position of the target member is changed. The form to be used, the form in which these are combined, and the like are exemplified.

The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the gaming machine E1 includes a base member, the light irradiation means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is displaceably arranged on the base member.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the light irradiating means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is displaceably arranged on the base member. The target wiring can be fixed, and the occurrence of disconnection can be suppressed accordingly.

In the game machine E2, a shielding member having an opening and being arranged on the base member is provided, and a part of the target member is made visible to the player from the opening of the shielding member, and the target member is illuminated by light. Formed from a transmissive material in a plate shape and provided with a reflecting portion, the light emitted from the light irradiating means and incident from the side end surface is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the target member. A game machine E3 featuring.

Here, in the reflecting portion, a plurality of groups composed of a plurality of reflecting surfaces are arranged, and each group forms a pattern or a pattern. Therefore, the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be recognized by the player as a pattern or a pattern.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, a shielding member having an opening and arranged on the base member is provided, and a part of the target member is visually recognized by the player from the opening of the shielding member. By displacing the target member, different parts of the target member can be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member.

For example, a first position in which the first group of the plurality of groups constituting the reflective portion is visible through the opening and a second group different from the first group are the openings. When the target member is displaceable from the second position which becomes visible via While making the player visually recognize the first pattern or pattern to be formed, by displacing the target member from the first position to the second position, the pattern or pattern to be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member can be obtained. , Can be changed to a second pattern or pattern formed by the second group.

In this case, since the target member is formed of a light-transmitting material, when the target member is displaced in order to change the pattern or pattern visually recognized by the player, the light from the light irradiation means is not irradiated. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the target member is displaced.

In the gaming machine E3, the target member is formed in a circular shape or an annular shape in front view, and is rotatably arranged on the base member with the center of the circular shape or the annular shape as a rotation center. Game machine E4 to play.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E3, the target member is formed in a circular shape or an annular shape in front view, and can rotate to the base member with the center of the circular shape or the annular shape as the center of rotation. Since it is arranged in, the target member is arranged while ensuring the number of patterns and patterns to be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member, as compared with the case where the target member can be slidably displaced. Space required for can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine E2, the target member is formed of a light-transmitting material in the shape of a circular plate in front view and has a reflecting portion, and receives light emitted from the light irradiating means and incident from the side end surface. A plurality of light irradiation means are distributed and arranged around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface is directed toward the side end surface of the target member. The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the target member is rotatably arranged on the base member with the center of the circular shape as the center of rotation.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of the game machine E6, the target member is formed of a light-transmitting material into a circular plate shape and has a reflecting portion, and is irradiated from the light irradiation means and from the side end surface. The incident light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the target member, and a plurality of light irradiation means are distributed around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface is directed to the side end surface of the target member. Therefore, by rotating the target member while irradiating light from the light irradiation means, the player can visually recognize the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front of the target member in a rotated state. can.

In the gaming machine E5, the plurality of light irradiating means are distributed and arranged in the circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the rotation center of the target member.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effect of the game machine E5, the plurality of light irradiation means are distributed and arranged in the circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the rotation center of the target member, so that the rotation position of the target member ( Regardless of the phase), the light emitted from the front of the target member can be easily kept constant. That is, it is possible to stably form a pattern or a pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front surface of the target member.

The gaming machine E7 is characterized in that the gaming machine E1 includes a base member, and the light irradiation means and the target member are displaceably arranged on the base member.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the light irradiation means and the target member are displaceably arranged on the base member. It is possible to increase the variation of the change of the irradiation mode. Therefore, it is possible to further change the mode in which the player visually recognizes, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to have an interest.

The gaming machine E7 includes a driving means for applying a driving force to the target member to displace it, and the light irradiation means is brought into contact with the target member displaced by the driving force applied from the driving means. The gaming machine E8 is characterized in that it is displaced together with the target member.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E7, a driving means for applying a driving force to the target member to displace it is provided, and the light irradiation means is a target displaced by the driving force applied from the driving means. When the members are in contact with each other, they are displaced together with the target member, so that the drive means for displacing the target member can also be used, and it is not necessary to separately provide a drive means for displacing the light irradiation means. can.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B9, C1 to C8, D1 to D6, and E1 to E8, the gaming machine K1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine K2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B9, C1 to C8, D1 to D6, and E1 to E8. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B9, C1 to C8, D1 to D6, and E1 to E8, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Machine K3. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
410 Base member 420L Left displacement member (displacement member)
420R Right displacement member (displacement member)
422 connecting hole (first part or second part)
423 Sliding groove (first part or second part, guide groove)
440 bogie member (first member or second member)
481 First drive motor (first drive means or second drive means)
485 protruding member (displacement member, second displacement member)
488L lower left rack (1st member or 2nd member)
488R Lower right rack (1st member or 2nd member)
488b Drive pin (connecting pin)
491 Second drive motor (first drive means or second drive means)
610, 5610, 6610 Base member 611, 5611, 6612 Back base (base member)
612,5612 Front base (base member)
612g holding pin (protrusion)
6612p Opening 6612r Shielding member 620, 2620, 3620, 5620, 6620 Projection plate member (target member, light transmitting member)
622,6622 Reflecting parts 630,3630 Gear member (outer edge member, emission increasing means)
631 Tooth part (curved rack gear)
640, 2640, 3640 Groove forming member (outer edge member, emission increasing means)
641,2641 Guide groove 651 LED (light emitting means, light irradiation means)
652 Board member 653 1st block (block body)
653b1 Insertion hole (fitting hole)
654 2nd block (block body)
654b1 Insertion hole (fitting hole)
661 Drive motor (drive means)
820 Front base (part of base member)
830 Back base (part of base member)
850 Displacement member 863 Transmission gear (rotating member)
863c Protruding part 870 Connecting member 880 Drive motor (driving means)
SP urging spring (elastic member)
S1, S2 screw C collar (support ring)
θ1 1st drive range (outer range)
θ2 2nd drive range (center range)

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine provided with a target member to be irradiated with light and a plurality of light emitting means arranged in such a posture that each of the target member faces an irradiation surface (a game machine). Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2015-29735

However, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that it takes a lot of time and effort to arrange the light emitting means.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the labor of arranging the light emitting means.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is a plurality of target members to be irradiated with light and a plurality of game machines distributed around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface is directed toward the target member. The light emitting means is provided, and one or a plurality of substrate members formed to be elastically deformable together with at least two or more light emitting means among the plurality of light emitting means, and the substrate member are elastically formed. It is provided with a base member that is held in a deformed predetermined posture.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the labor of arranging the light emitting means can be suppressed.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a rear view of the displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of the left displacement member and the right displacement member. It is a rear perspective view of the left displacement member and the right displacement member. It is a front perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 1st aspect. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 1st aspect. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 21. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 1st aspect. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 23. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 2nd aspect. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 25. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 3rd aspect. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 27. It is a front view of a projection unit. It is a rear view of a projection unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a projection unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a projection unit. It is a front view of the rear base. It is a rear view of the front base and the irradiation unit. It is a rear view of the front base. FIG. 34 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front base and the irradiation unit in the direction of arrow XXXVI in FIG. 34. It is a front view of the projection plate member, the gear member, and the groove forming member. FIG. 37 is a partial cross-sectional view of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member in the line XXXVIII-XXXVIII of FIG. 37. (A) is a rear view of the projection unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the projection unit in the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 39 (a). (A) to (c) are partially enlarged sectional views of a projection unit. (A) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (A) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (A) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (A) is a top view of the irradiation unit, and (b) is a front view of the irradiation unit in the direction of arrow XLIVb in FIG. 44 (a). (A) is a rear view of the irradiation unit in the direction of arrow XLVa of FIG. 44 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the irradiation unit in the line XLVb-XLVb of FIG. 44 (b). (A) is a front view of the first block, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first block in the XLVIb-XLVIb line of FIG. 46 (a), and (c) is a front view of the second block. (D) is a cross-sectional view of the second block in the XLVId-XLVId line of FIG. 46 (c). It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in the 1st position. It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in an intermediate position. It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in the 2nd position. It is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in the 1st position. It is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in an intermediate position. It is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in the 2nd position. (A) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connecting member in the first position, (b) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connecting member in the intermediate position, and (c) is a transmission in the second position. It is a rear view of a gear and a connecting member. (A) to (c) are rear views of the transmission gear and the connecting member in the first drive range. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit in the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 54, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 55, and (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view. , FIG. 56 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit in the LIXc-LIXc line of FIG. (A) is a front view of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member in the second embodiment, and (b) is a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove in the LXb-LXb line of FIG. 60 (a). It is sectional drawing of the forming member. It is sectional drawing of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member. It is sectional drawing of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member. It is sectional drawing of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member. (A) is a front view of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member in a third embodiment, and (b) is a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove in the LXIVb-LXIVb line of FIG. 64 (a). It is sectional drawing of the forming member. (A) is a side view of a projection plate member, a gear member and a groove forming member in the direction of arrow LXVa of FIG. 64 (a), and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the member, the gear member and the groove forming member, and (c) is the sectional view of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member in the LXVc-LXVc line of FIG. 65 (a). (A) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (A) is a top view of the irradiation unit according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the irradiation unit. (A) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit in the vicinity of the first block, and (b) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit in the vicinity of the second block. It is a front view of the projection unit in 5th Embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of a projection unit. It is a rear view of the front base. It is a rear view of a projection unit. (A) is a front view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a front view of the projection unit in the second state. (A) is a rear view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a rear view of the projection unit in the second state. (A) is a front view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a front view of the projection unit in the third state. (A) is a rear view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a rear view of the projection unit in the second state. It is a front view of the projection unit in the sixth embodiment. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a projection unit. It is a rear view of the front base in the state which the front base and the irradiation unit are assembled. (A) to (c) are rear views of the projection unit.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 59, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 1 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 has an outer frame 2 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 2 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. It is provided with an inner frame 4 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 4 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front door 5 and the lower plate unit 15. 5 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 4 and the lock of the front door 5 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 5c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses 8 is arranged on the back surface side of the front door 5, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 via the glass unit 16.

On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 5c. In the pachinko machine 1, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, in the pachinko machine 1, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

Below the window portion 5c, a ball lending operation portion 40 is arranged. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76, 77, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled and configured, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side of. The base plate 60 is made of wood made by laminating thin plate materials, and is formed so that the player cannot see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in the through hole of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 77 in the same manner as the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 76, 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable change jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or an off symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 1, a lottery is performed when a prize is given to either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high-probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a big hit is increased as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 140. The "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased and the second winning opening 140 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened is changed, which is longer than the normal time. The time is set. When the first electric accessory 140a is in the open state (open state), the second winning opening 140 is compared with the case where the first electric accessory 140a is in the closed state (closed state). The ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize. Therefore, during the probable change or the shortened working hours, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit. The change may be made so that the number of times that the first electric accessory 140a is opened is increased more than in the normal state. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol does not change during the probability change or the time reduction, and the time when the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened and the first electric accessory per hit. At least one of the number of times the 140a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened, and the first electric accessory 140a and the second electric accessory 82 are opened at one time. It may be changed so that only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased as compared with the normal time, without repeating the number of times.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the winning (starting winning) of either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and is the third. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays variable symbols, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of the first through gate 66. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately alternates between the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66. It is a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 1, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is used. It is configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the first electric accessory 140a of the second winning opening 140. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change and the time saving.

It should be noted that the second winning opening during the probability change or the time reduction can be achieved by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 140a per hit to increase the probability of hitting during the probability change or the time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the 140 and the third winning opening, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 140a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board can pass through the balls flowing down the game board. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). ) Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the first through gate 66 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). .. Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second winning opening 140 in which a ball can win is arranged below the front view of the first winning opening 64. When the ball wins in the second winning opening 140, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 (not shown) is turned on due to the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second winning opening 140 may be configured as five.

A first electric accessory 140a is attached to the second winning opening 140. The first electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 140. There is. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140a is displayed. It becomes an open state (enlarged state), and it becomes easy for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 140.

As described above, during the probabilistic change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. The symbol of "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the first electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the first electric accessory 140a is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is easier to win in the second winning opening 140 as compared with the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 140. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 140 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first electric accessory 140a as in the second winning opening 140, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Therefore, toward the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained, and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning opening 140 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is launched toward the second winning opening 140 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the first through gate 66. It is advantageous for the player to open the first electric accessory 140a and aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning a prize in the second winning opening 140.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit for the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 1, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 140 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be a symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64, for example. It may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

In the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82, are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. To. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 1 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device by the MPU 201. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes each drive motor 481,491,661,880.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operating unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 59. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operating unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 200. 7 and 8 are front views of the operating unit 200.

In FIG. 7, the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, the protrusion member 485, and the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 of the displacement unit 400 are displaced to the retracted positions, respectively. The states in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, the projecting member 485, and the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 are respectively displaced to the overhanging positions of the 400 and 400 are illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 300 formed in a box shape, and a displacement unit 400, a projection unit 600, and a vertical displacement unit 800 are respectively in the internal space of the back case 300. It is housed in order.

The rear case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front, and the wall portions 301 and 302 respectively. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. A front-view rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

The displacement unit 400 includes a front view frame-shaped base member 410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, a left displacement member 420L displaceably disposed on the base member 410, and a right displacement member 420R. A retracting position for retracting the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projecting member 485 to the rear side of the projection unit 600, and an opening 301a of the rear case 300 (that is, a third symbol display device). It can be displaced from the overhanging position on the front side of 81) (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the displacement unit 400 is provided with two drive means (first drive motor 481 and second drive motor 491) for driving the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R, and protruding member 485). By selecting the driving means to be driven, it is possible to make the displacement mode of the displacement member different (form a plurality of types of displacement modes). The details of such a structure will be described later.

The projection unit 600 is a front view ring-shaped base member 610 arranged in front of the displacement unit 400, a disk-shaped projection plate member 620 arranged on the inner peripheral side of the base member 610, and projection. A plurality of LEDs 651 for incident light from the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620 are provided. The projection plate member 620 is made of a light-transmitting material, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player, and when light is incident from the LED 651, the incident light is used as a pattern or a pattern. It is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in the form of a pattern. That is, a pattern or a symbol can be highlighted (displayed) on the front surface of the third symbol display device 81.

In this case, the projection unit 600 adopts a structure that enhances the efficiency of incident light emitted from the LED 651 onto the projection plate member 620, and strengthens the light emitted from the front surface of the projection plate member 620 (patterns and patterns). Can be clearly highlighted). Further, a structure that enhances workability when assembling a plurality of LEDs 651 (irradiation unit 650) to the base member 610 is adopted. Details of these structures will be described later.

The vertical displacement unit 800 includes a front base 820 and a rear base 830 arranged at the upper part of the base member 610 of the projection unit 600, and a displacement member 850 whose one end is rotatably supported by both base members 820 and 830. The other end side of the displacement member 850 can be displaced between the retracted position above the opening 301a (that is, the third symbol display device 81) of the rear case 300 and the overhanging position extending to the front side. Yes (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the vertical displacement unit 800 includes an urging spring SP for urging the displacement member 850, and the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elasticity of the urging spring SP at a predetermined position between the retracted position and the overhanging position. By balancing the restoring force, the displacement member 850 is made to perform a reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP around the equilibrium position (predetermined position). The structure is adopted. The details of such a structure will be described later.

Next, the displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 28. 9 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 10 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400.

The displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and a displacement member (left displacement member 420L and right displacement) that is displaceably arranged on the base member 410. The member 420R) and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) driving means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) for applying a driving force to the displacement member are mainly provided, and as described above, the lower drive is provided. When the displacement member is displaced by driving the mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481), when the displacement member is displaced by driving the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), or when the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive) is displaced. When the displacement member is displaced by driving both the motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), the displacement member is formed so as to be able to be displaced in a different manner. Hereinafter, the details of the structure will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 18.

First, the displacement members (left displacement member 420L and right displacement member 420R) will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R, and FIG. 12 is a rear perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the displacement unit 400 includes a left displacement member 420L and a right displacement member 420R formed as displacement members that produce an effect by displacement, and the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are provided with the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. , The left driven member 430L and the right driven member 430R, the bogie member 440, and the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R are connected.

The left displacement member 420L is a long member arranged in a vertical posture, and has a connecting shaft 421 projecting from the back surface, a connecting hole 422 drilled at the upper end, and a slide bored at the lower end. It is provided with a moving groove 423. The connecting shaft 421 is a shaft having a circular cross section, and the connecting hole 431 of the left driven member 430L is rotatably supported. That is, the upper end of the left driven member 430L is rotatably connected to the back surface side of the left displacement member 420L.

The connecting shaft 421 is set to a length dimension in which the tip protrudes from the back surface of the left driven member 430L, and the tip of the protruding connecting shaft 421 is a drive groove 494c (in the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490). (See FIGS. 17 and 18) is slidably inserted. That is, when the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven (rotated), the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c acts on the connecting shaft 421, and the left displacement member 420L is displaced.

The connecting hole 422 is a hole having a circular cross section, and one of the two connecting shafts 441 of the carriage member 440, which will be described later, is rotatably inserted through the connecting shaft 441. That is, the left displacement member 420L is connected in a state where a relative posture change (rotation around the axis of rotation of the connecting hole 422) with respect to the carriage member 440L is allowed.

The sliding groove 423 is a groove extending along the longitudinal direction of the left displacement member 420L, and the drive pin 488b (see FIG. 15) of the lower left rack 488L described later is rotatably and slidably inserted. .. Therefore, in either case where only the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven while the lower left rack 488L is stopped, or vice versa, the posture change (rotation) of the left displacement member 420L with respect to the base member 410. Can be formed.

The left driven member 430L is a member that is driven by the displacement of the left displacement member 420L by being erected between the base member 410 and the left displacement member 420L, and is a connecting hole 431 drilled at one end (upper end). And a sliding pin 432 projecting from the back surface.

The connecting hole 431 is a hole having a circular cross section, and as described above, the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is rotatably inserted. The sliding pin 432 is a pin (rod-shaped body) having a circular cross section, and is rotatably and slidably inserted into the sliding groove 410a formed on the side of the base member 410. Therefore, when the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the left driven member 430L can be driven while changing its relative posture with respect to the left displacement member 420L.

The bogie member 440 rolls on a rolling surface extending along the left-right direction (width direction) in the upper portion (upper middle portion 410f and upper front portion 410 g, see FIGS. 17 and 18) of the base member 410. It is provided with two connecting shafts 441 arranged side by side in parallel and four rolling wheels 442 rotatably supported at both ends of each connecting shaft 441. Therefore, the upper end of the left displacement member 420L is displaced along the left-right direction (width direction) via the bogie member 440 by rolling the rolling wheels 442 of the bogie member 440 on the rolling surface. ..

The rolling surface of the base member 410 is formed as a substantially horizontal flat surface facing the upper side in the vertical direction, and each rolling wheel 442 of the bogie member 440 is placed on the rolling surface. That is, the left displacement member 420 is suspended and supported on the rolling surface of the base member 410 via the bogie member 440.

The upper left rack 450L slides a guide portion extending in the left-right direction (width direction) in the upper portion (upper middle portion 410f and upper front portion 410g, see FIGS. 17 and 18) of the base member 410. It is a long plate-shaped member, and is engraved along the longitudinal direction on the back surface of the upper left rack 450L and two connecting holes 451 through which the two connecting shafts 441 of the bogie member 440 are rotatably inserted. A rack gear 452 is provided.

Here, the right displacement member 420R is formed in a substantially symmetrical shape with respect to the left displacement member 420L, the right driven member 430R with respect to the left driven member 430L, and the upper right rack 450R with respect to the upper left rack 450L. Since the configurations are substantially the same, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

However, the rack gear 452 is engraved in front of the upper right rack 450R. Further, in the upper right rack 450R, the formed portion of the connecting hole 451 is offset to the front side, and the upper right rack 450R is arranged at a position different from that of the upper left rack 450L in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the rack gear 452 of the upper left rack 450L and the rack gear 452 of the upper right rack 450R are arranged to face each other with a predetermined interval. In this case, both rack gears 452 are meshed with pinion gears 459 rotatably supported by the base member 410.

Therefore, with the displacement of the left displacement member 420L, the upper left rack 450L is displaced (sliding) in the left-right direction (width direction, FIG. 19 left-right direction) along the guide portion (not shown) of the base member 410. Since the displacement of the upper left rack 450L is transmitted to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, the right displacement member 420R can be displaced.

In this embodiment, since the number of pinion gears 459 interposed between the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R is an odd number (that is, one), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged. The displacement direction can be the opposite direction (direction in which they are close to each other or separated from each other). However, the number of pinion gears 459 may be an even number, and the displacement directions of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R may be the same.

Next, the lower drive mechanism 480 among the plurality of drive means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16.

13 and 15 are front perspective views of the displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 14 and 16 are rear perspective views of the displacement unit 400. Note that FIGS. 13 and 14 show a state in which the back cover 412 is attached, and FIGS. 15 and 16 show a state in which the back cover 412 is removed. Further, in FIGS. 13 to 16, the raising cover 413 is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 13 to 16, the lower drive mechanism 480 is a drive in which the first drive motor 481, the pinion gear 482 attached to the drive shaft of the first drive motor 481, and the pinion gear 482 are meshed with each other. A gear 483, a drive arm 484 forming a crank mechanism together with the drive gear 483, a protruding member 485 driven by the drive arm 484, a rack gear 486 arranged on the back surface of the protruding member 485, and a rack gear 486 thereof. Mainly includes a gear train (gears 487a to 487e) to which the first gear 487a is meshed with, and a lower left rack 488L and a lower right rack 488R meshed with the gear 487e at the end of the gear train.

The first drive motor 481 is attached to the front surface of the left front cover 411L, and a pinion gear 482 is attached (fixed) to the drive shaft of the first drive motor 481 protruding from the back surface of the left front cover 411L. The cover. The drive gear 483 is rotatably supported on the back surface of the left front cover 411L, and the drive arm 484 is rotatably supported on the front surface of the base member 410.

The drive gear 483 includes an eccentric pin 483a that is eccentric from the center of rotation and projects from the back surface. The drive arm 484 has a shaft support hole 484a through which the support shaft of the base member 410 is rotatably inserted, a linear sliding groove 484b through which the eccentric pin 483a of the drive gear 483 is slidably inserted, and their shafts. It includes a support hole 484a and a drive pin 484c projecting from the front at an end opposite to the side on which the sliding groove 484b is formed.

Therefore, when the drive gear 483 is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction via the pinion gear 482 by the driving force of the first drive motor 481, the sliding groove 484b of the drive arm 484 is rotated from the eccentric pin 483a of the drive gear 483. When one or the other inner wall surface is affected, the drive arm 484 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction with the shaft support hole 484a as the center of rotation, and the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484 is raised or lowered.

The projecting member 485 includes a linear sliding groove 485a through which the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484 is slidably inserted, and is arranged in front of the base member 410 via the slide rail SL. The slide rail SL is a telescopic linear guide mechanism, and is arranged in a vertical posture in which the telescopic direction is along the vertical direction. The slide rail SL is interposed between the base end rails arranged in front of the base member 410, the tip rails arranged on the back surface of the projecting member 485, and the base end rails and the tip rails. It is provided with an intermediate rail that allows the end rail and the tip rail to be displaced relative to each other in the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, when the drive arm 484 is rotated and the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 485a of the projecting member 485 is pushed up or down by the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484, the slide rail SL is expanded and contracted, and the projecting member 485 is used as a base. It is moved up and down in the vertical direction with respect to the member 410.

The rack gear 486 is engraved along the elevating direction of the projecting member 485, and the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) has the front and right front of the base member 410 with the leading gear 487a meshed with the rack gear 486. It is rotatably supported between the back surface of the cover 411R and the back surface of the cover 411R. Therefore, by moving the protruding member 485 up and down, the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) can be rotated by utilizing the linear motion of the rack gear 486.

The lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are long plate-shaped members, and the rack gear 488a is engraved on the side surface along the longitudinal direction thereof, and the drive pin 488b is projected from the front at the end portion in the longitudinal direction. And each. The lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are positioned differently in the vertical direction, and the rack gears 488a face each other in the left-right direction (width direction) between the back surface of the base member 410 and the front surface of the back cover 412. , FIG. 19 left-right direction) and slidably held.

The gear 487e at the end of the gear train is coaxially fixed to the adjacent gear 487d and protrudes to the rear side through the opening 410b formed in the base member 410, whereby the lower left rack 488L and the lower right It is meshed with each rack gear 488a of the rack 488R. Therefore, as described above, when the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) is rotated as the protruding member 485 moves up and down, the rotation of the gear 487a at the end causes the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R to rotate with each other. It can be linearly moved in the opposite direction (direction in which they are close to each other or separated from each other).

The drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are projected to the front side through the linear insertion groove 410c formed in the base member 410, so that the left displacement member 420L is as described above. And rotatably and slidably inserted into the sliding groove 423 of the right displacement member 420R. Therefore, by linearly moving the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R, the lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced.

The extending direction of the insertion groove 410c is formed substantially parallel to the rolling surface on which the rolling wheel 442 of the bogie member 440 rolls. That is, the direction of the linear motion of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R is substantially parallel to the direction of the linear motion of the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R described later.

Next, the upper drive mechanism 490 among the plurality of drive means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18.

FIG. 17 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 18 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit 400. In FIGS. 17 and 18, for ease of understanding, the pinion gear 459 and the upper right rack 450R are shown between the upper intermediate portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g facing each other.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the upper drive mechanism 490 is a drive in which the second drive motor 491, the pinion gear 492 attached to the drive shaft of the second drive motor 491, and the pinion gear 492 are meshed with each other. It mainly includes a gear 493 and a drive arm 494 that forms a crank mechanism together with the drive gear 493.

The base member 410 is formed as a divided structure in which the upper portion (upper side portion formed in the shape of a substantially frame in front view) is superposed on the front side in order of the upper back surface portion 410e, the upper intermediate portion 410f, and the front surface portion 410g. Will be done.

The second drive motor 491 is attached to the front of an upwardly protruding portion of the upper intermediate portion 410f, and a pinion gear is attached to the drive shaft of the second drive motor 491 protruding from the back surface of the overhanging portion. 492 is attached (fixed). The drive gear 493 and the drive arm 494 are rotatably supported on the back surface of the upper intermediate portion 410f.

The drive gear 493 includes an eccentric pin 493a that is eccentric from the center of rotation and is projected from the back surface. The drive arm 494 has a shaft support hole 494a through which the support shaft of the upper intermediate portion 410f is rotatably inserted, a linear sliding groove 494b through which the eccentric pin 493a of the drive gear 493 is slidably inserted, and the like. It is provided with a shaft support hole 494a and a linear drive groove 494c located at an end opposite to the side on which the sliding groove 494b is formed.

Therefore, when the drive gear 493 is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction via the pinion gear 492 by the driving force of the second drive motor 491, the sliding groove 494b of the drive arm 494 is rotated from the eccentric pin 493a of the drive gear 493. When one or the other inner wall surface is affected, the drive arm 494 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction with the shaft support hole 494a as the center of rotation, and the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494 is displaced to the left or right.

As described above, the tip of the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is slidably inserted into the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494. Therefore, by driving the drive arm 494 (rotating around the shaft support hole 494a) and causing the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c displaced to the left and right to act on the connecting shaft 421, the bogie member 440 (rolling wheel 442) is covered. The upper end side of the left displacement member 420L can be displaced to the left or right by rolling along the rolling surface.

In this case, when the left displacement member 420L is displaced left and right and the carriage member 440 (rolling wheel 442) is rolled on the rolling surface, the upper left rack 450L becomes the guide portion of the base member 410 as described above. It is displaced (sliding) in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 19) along the line, and the displacement of the upper left rack 450L is transmitted to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, whereby the right displacement member. The 420R can be displaced. The rolling surface on which the rolling wheel 442 of the bogie member 440 rolls is formed on the upper intermediate portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g.

Next, the operation of the displacement unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 28.

First, both the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) are driven to drive the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R and projecting member 485). The first aspect of displacement will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 24.

19, 21 and 23 are front views of the displacement unit 400 in the first aspect, and FIGS. 20, 22 and 24 are the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIGS. 19, 21 and 23. It is a rear view.

19 and 20 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projecting member 485 are arranged at the retracted positions, and FIGS. 23 and 24 show the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. And corresponds to the state in which the protruding member 485 is arranged at the overhanging position in the first aspect.

As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, in the state of being arranged in the retracted position, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged in the outermost direction (the position where they are most separated from each other in the left-right direction), and are also arranged. The protruding member 485 is arranged at the lowermost position.

When the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven from this state, the states shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 are passed, and then the states shown in FIGS. 23 and 24 are shown. The left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced toward each other in the left-right direction (width direction) and the projecting member 485 is raised until the state (overhanging position in the first aspect). In the overhanging position in the first aspect, the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projecting member 485 are united (a state in which the sides of the three are in close contact with each other).

Specifically, when the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from the state of FIG. 19, the drive arm 484 is rotated, and the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484 is a sliding groove 485a of the protruding member 485. By pushing up the inner wall surface of the above, the projecting member 485 is raised (see FIGS. 13 and 14).

Further, when the projecting member 485 is raised, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are displaced (linear motion) via the rack gear 486, the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) and the rack gear 488a (FIGS. 15 and 15). 16), the drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R act on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 423 of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R, thereby causing the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement. The lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the member 420R is displaced (linear motion) along the insertion groove 410c of the base member 410 in a direction close to each other.

On the other hand, when the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state of FIG. 19, the drive arm 494 is rotated, and the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494 is the connecting shaft of the left displacement member 420L. It acts on 421. As a result, the bogie member 440 is rolled on the rolling surface, and the upper end side (bogie member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced (linear motion) in a direction close to the right displacement member 420R (FIGS. 17 and 17). 18).

Further, when the upper end side (trolley member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, whereby the right displacement member 420R is displaced. The upper end side (carriage member 440) is displaced (linear motion) in a direction close to the left displacement member 420L (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

In the present embodiment, the displacement amount of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 20) is smaller than the displacement amount on the upper end side (the displacement amount on the lower end side). That is, the movable range of the drive pin 488b (extended length of the insertion groove 410c) is shorter than the movable range of the carriage member 440 (extended length of the rolling surface).

In this case, the lower end side and the upper end side of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R start displacement substantially simultaneously from the retracted position (see FIGS. 19 and 20), and the overhanging position (overhanging position) in the first aspect (see FIGS. 19 and 20). The lower drive mechanism 480 and the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven so as to reach (see FIGS. 23 and 24) at substantially the same time. That is, the displacement speed in the left-right direction on the upper end side (trolley member 440) is faster than that on the lower end side (drive pin 488b).

As a result, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced in the left-right direction while rotating their postures, instead of being displaced in parallel in the left-right direction without rotation while maintaining the vertical posture. That is, it is impossible to displace the posture while rotating it in this way in the configuration in which the displacement member is slid along the slide groove by the driving force of the driving means of 1. It was possible for the first time to use the driving means of.

Further, when the displacement speed in the left-right direction of the upper end side (bogie member 440) is different from that of the lower end side (drive pin 488b), the distance between the drive pin 488b and the bogie member 440 is changed. Since the moving groove 423 has an elongated hole shape extending in the vertical direction with a length larger than the diameter of the drive pin 488b, it is possible to absorb a change in the distance between the two. That is, it is not necessary to provide a complicated mechanism, and the sliding groove 423 and the drive pin 488b may be formed to be rotatable and slidable. Therefore, in addition to reducing the product cost, the reliability and durability of the operation are improved. be able to.

From the state shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, when the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven in the opposite directions to those described above, FIGS. 21 and 22 show. After passing through the indicated states, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in the left-right direction (width direction) to the states shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 (retracted positions), and the protruding member 485 is displaced. Is lowered.

Then, only the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) is driven (that is, the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) is maintained in the non-drive state), and the displacement member (left displacement member 420L, A second aspect of displacing the right displacement member 420R and the projecting member 485) will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. In the description of the second aspect, FIGS. 19 and 20 are also referred to as appropriate.

25 is a front view of the displacement unit 400 in the second aspect, and FIG. 26 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIG. 25. Note that FIGS. 25 and 26 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projecting member 485 are arranged at the overhanging positions in the second aspect.

Here, in the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 (state arranged in the retracted position), in the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490, the left displacement member 420L rotates on the upper end side (axis center of the connecting hole 422). It is arranged in a posture that allows it to rotate as a center. That is, it is allowed that the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L slides along the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494.

Therefore, when only the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from this state (states shown in FIGS. 19 and 20), as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the drive pin of the drive arm 484 is shown. When the 484c pushes up the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 485a of the projecting member 485, the projecting member 485 is raised, and the drive pin 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R has the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member. By acting on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 423 of the 420R, the lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R is displaced (linear motion) in a direction close to each other. That is, in the second aspect, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be rotated with the upper end side (the axis of the connecting hole 422) as the center of rotation.

Then, only the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) is driven (that is, the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) is maintained in a non-drive state), and the displacement member (left displacement member 420L and A third aspect of displacing the right displacement member 420R) will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. In the description of the third aspect, FIGS. 19 and 20 are also referred to as appropriate.

27 is a front view of the displacement unit 400 in the third aspect, and FIG. 28 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIG. 27. Note that FIGS. 27 and 28 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged at the overhanging positions in the third aspect.

Here, the sliding groove 423 of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R has an elongated hole shape extending in the vertical direction with a length larger than the diameter of the drive pin 488b, and has a left displacement member 420L and a right displacement. It is permissible for member 420R to be lifted upwards.

Therefore, when only the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 (the state arranged in the retracted position), the drive arm is driven as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28. The inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c of the 494 is acted on the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L, and the upper end side (trolley member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced (linear motion) in a direction close to the right displacement member 420R. In both cases, the displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, so that the upper end side (carriage member 440) of the right displacement member 420R is displaced in a direction closer to the left displacement member 420L. (Linear motion).

That is, in the third aspect, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be rotated with the lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) as the rotation center. Further, in the third aspect, only the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced, and the protruding member 485 can be maintained in the stopped state.

Here, in the conventional gaming machine, a guide means (for example, a guide groove) is extended to the base member 410, and the displacement member is formed so as to be able to be displaced (guided) along the guide means. The displacement mode of the member (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one. Therefore, the effect of the displacement of the displacement member becomes one pattern, and it is difficult to perform the effect that surprises the player. Even if the driving force (driving speed) of the driving means (for example, the driving motor) is changed by varying the strength, the displacement speed of the displacement member only increases or decreases, and the displacement mode (trajectory) remains constant. Therefore, it is difficult to produce a surprising effect of the player.

On the other hand, according to the displacement unit 400 of the present embodiment, the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) are provided, and the drive state thereof is selected (changed). Thereby, the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R, and projecting member 485) can be displaced in three types (first aspect, second aspect, and third aspect). That is, unlike the conventional product in which the displacement mode of the displacement member is limited to one, the effect is not one pattern, and the displacement member can be displaced in at least three displacement modes, so that the displacement mode is switched. As a result, it is possible to create a surprising effect for the player.

In particular, in the first aspect (see FIGS. 19 to 24), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced by parallel movement (linear motion), while the second aspect. And in the third aspect (see FIGS. 19, 25 to 28), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced only by rotation (rotational motion), and the motion form of the displacement is different. Can be made. As a result, the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be made large, and the player can easily perform a surprising effect.

In this case, in the conventional product, there is a product in which the center of rotation remains constant and the displacement mode is different by changing only the rotation direction, but the second mode and the third mode in the present embodiment are , Not only the rotation direction is different in the same rotation center, but the rotation direction is different and the rotation center is also formed differently (in the second aspect, the upper end side is the rotation center, and the third aspect). The lower end side is regarded as the center of rotation), and the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member (left displacement member 420L and right displacement member 420R) can be made large, and it is possible to easily perform a surprising effect of the player.

Further, in the first aspect, the displacement members (left displacement member 420L and right displacement member 420R) are displaced in a form in which rotation and translation (linear motion) are combined, and the direction of such rotation is the third aspect. It is the same direction as the direction of rotation in. Therefore, in the initial stages of the first aspect and the third aspect (see, for example, FIGS. 21 and 27), the player can visually recognize the displacement members so as to be displaced in a close direction, and distinguish between them. Can be difficult to attach. On the other hand, in the first aspect, the projecting member 485 is raised with the displacement of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R in the proximity direction, whereas in the third aspect, the projecting member 485 is stopped. Can be maintained in a state. That is, in the initial stage where the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in a direction close to each other, when the projecting member 485 is raised, the displacement member is displaced to the overhanging position in the first aspect. You can expect the player to do that.

In the displacement unit 400, the bogie member 440, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are respectively arranged (held) on the base member 410 so as to be linearly displaceable, and the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged on the bogie member 440. The upper end side (connecting hole 422) is rotatably connected, and the drive pin 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R is rotatably connected to the lower end side (sliding groove 423) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. It is rotatably and slidably inserted.

As a result, as described above, the structure for causing the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R to perform a linear motion (first aspect) including a rotational component and a rotational motion (second and third aspects). Can be simplified. For example, it is conceivable to provide a curved guide groove and displace the displacement member along the guide groove, but in the case of sliding displacement along such a curved locus, a complicated structure is required (). That is, in the case of a curved locus, not only the mechanism for guiding the member corresponding to the trolley member 440, the member corresponding to the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R in a curved shape, but also each of these members 440, It will be necessary to provide the 488L and 488R with a mechanism that can continuously apply the driving force).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the bogie member 440, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R may be guided in a straight line direction, and therefore the bogie member 440 may be guided by a rolling surface as a flat surface. Since the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R can utilize the rack and pinion mechanism, their structures can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the durability and the reliability of operation.

Further, according to the displacement unit 400, in any of the first aspect, the second aspect and the third aspect, the mechanism for guiding the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R is common, and specifically, One end side (upper end side) of each displacement member 420L, 420R is guided by the bogie member 440 rolling on the rolling surface, and the other end side (lower end side) is the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack. The 488R is guided by sliding (linear motion) between the base member 410 and the back cover 412. That is, it is not necessary to provide different guide mechanisms according to each aspect, and therefore it is not necessary to adopt a structure for switching between different guide mechanisms. As a result, the structure can be simplified, the reliability and durability of the operation can be improved, and the product cost can be reduced.

Next, the projection unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 46.

First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 32. 29 is a front view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 30 is a rear view of the projection unit 600. 31 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the projection unit 600.

As shown in FIGS. 29 to 32, the projection unit 600 includes a front view ring-shaped base member 610, a disk-shaped projection plate member 620 rotatably arranged on the base member 610, and a projection thereof. A plurality of irradiation units 650 arranged so as to surround the outer peripheral side of the plate member 620, a drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 620, and a driving force of the drive motor 661 to be transmitted to the projection plate member 620. It is mainly provided with a gear train (gears 662 to 664) of the above.

The base member 610 includes a ring-shaped back base 611 and an annular front base 612 disposed in front of the back base 611, and is formed between the facing surfaces of the back base 611 and the front base 612. The projection plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664) are housed in the internal space.

In the area inside the inner peripheral edge of the front base 612 in the front view (hereinafter referred to as “display area”), the projection plate member 620 is visible to the player, and the area outside the inner peripheral edge of the front base 612. (That is, the area shielded by the front base 612) (hereinafter, referred to as "outside the display area"), the projection plate member 620 is made invisible to the player.

The projection plate member 620 is made of a light-transmitting material, and the display of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface side is transmitted to the player to visually recognize the projection plate member 620, and the projection plate member 620 is irradiated from the irradiation unit 650. When the light is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in a manner of forming a pattern or a pattern, and is visually recognized by the player. That is, a pattern or a symbol can be highlighted (displayed) on the front surface of the third symbol display device 81.

A gear member 630 and a groove forming member 640 are arranged on the back surface side and the front surface side, respectively, on the outer peripheral edge portion of the projection plate member 620. The gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are formed in an annular shape in the front view and are arranged concentrically with the projection plate member 620.

A plurality of teeth are engraved on the gear member 630 along the outer peripheral surface, and the gear 664 at the end of the gear train is meshed with the gear member 630. The groove forming member 640 is a member for forming a guide groove 641 having a U-shaped cross section continuous in the circumferential direction with the projection plate member 620, and is a plurality of collars rotatably supported by the base member 610. By guiding C to the guide groove 641, the projection plate member 620 is rotatably held by the base member 610. The detailed configuration of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 will be described later.

The irradiation unit 650 is a unit provided with a plurality of light emitting means (LED 651) for incident light from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and each LED 651 faces the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 (opposites the outer peripheral surface). A plurality of (5 in this embodiment) are arranged in the posture. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the extension line of the irradiation direction of each LED 651 is set to pass through the substantially center of the projection plate member 620. The details of the mounting structure of the irradiation unit 650 to the base member 610 will be described later.

The drive motor 661 is arranged on the back surface side of the rear surface base 611, and the gear 662 at the head of the gear train is connected (fixed) to the drive shaft of the drive motor 661. Further, a gear member 630 arranged on the projection plate member 620 is meshed with the gear 664 at the end of the gear train. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the drive motor 661 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the gear member 630 via the gear train (gear 662 to gear 664), and the projection plate member 620 is rotated.

Next, the holding structure of the projection plate member 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 38. FIG. 33 is a front view of the rear base 611. FIG. 34 is a rear view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650, and FIG. 35 is a rear view of the front base 612.

As shown in FIG. 33, the back surface base 611 has an inner standing portion and 611a erected on the inner edge portion of the annular plate member, and an outer standing portion erected on the outer edge portion of the annular plate member. An inner concave groove in a region surrounded by an intermediate standing portion 611b that is erected between the setting portion 611c, the inner standing portion 611a and the outer standing portion 611c, and the inner standing portion 611b and the inner standing portion 611a. Mainly provided with 611d, an outer recess 611e in a region surrounded by the inner standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 611c, and a regulating protrusion 611f projecting from an annular plate member at predetermined intervals. It is formed.

The inner standing portion 611a is erected on the front side (front side of the paper in FIG. 33) from the inner edge portion of the annular plate member, and has a constant thickness in the radial direction.

The outer erection portion 611c is erected on the front side (front side of the paper in FIG. 33) from the outer edge portion of the annular plate member, and has a constant thickness in the radial direction.

The intermediate standing portion 611b is erected at an intermediate position between the inner standing portion 611a and the outer standing portion 611b. Further, the intermediate standing portion 611b is formed by being divided into seven parts around the axis, and each divided end portion is connected to the outer standing portion 611c.

The inner concave groove 611d is a region for arranging the outer edge portion of the projection plate member 620 described later inside, and surrounds the annular plate member, the inner standing portion 611a, and the intermediate standing portion 611b in three directions. Is formed.

The outer concave groove 611e is a region for arranging the irradiation unit 650 described later inside, and is formed by surrounding the annular plate member, the outer standing portion 611c, and the intermediate standing portion 611b in three directions. To.

The regulation protrusion 611f is a protrusion that prevents the collar C pivotally supported by the front base 612 from rattling on the back side, and is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter larger than the inner diameter of the hole opened in the axis of the collar C. At the same time, a protrusion is formed on the front side. In this embodiment, the regulation protrusions 611f are formed at six locations with predetermined intervals.

As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, on the back surface of the front base 612, the inner standing portion 611a, the intermediate standing portion 611b, the outer standing portion 611c, and the regulation protrusion 611f of the back base 611 are supported. The erection portion 612a, the intermediate erection portion 612b, the outer erection portion 612c, and the shaft portion 612f are erected. That is, in the state where the base member 610 is assembled, the standing tip surfaces of the standing portions 612a to 612c of the front base 612 are overlapped with the standing tip surfaces of the standing portions 611a to 611c of the back base 611. At the same time, the tip of the shaft portion 612f is inserted into the regulation protrusion 611f.

A plurality of holding pins 612g are erected in the area on the back surface of the front base 612 between the intermediate standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 612c. The holding pin 612g is an axial state having a circular cross section for positioning and holding the irradiation unit 650, and is arranged at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction.

As described above, the irradiation unit 650 is a unit provided with a plurality of LEDs 651 and for incident the light emitted from each of the LEDs 651 from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, along the periphery of the projection plate member 620. Arranged. That is, the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 is surrounded by a plurality of irradiation units 650.

The irradiation unit 650 is the back surface of the front base 612 and is mounted in the area between the intermediate standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 612c, and the front surface of the back base 611 is superimposed on the back surface of the front base 612. As a result, they are accommodated between the facing surfaces (internal space) of both bases 611 and 612.

FIG. 36 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650 in the direction of arrow XXXVI of FIG. 34.

As shown in FIG. 36, a substantially semicircular cutout portion 612b1 is formed in the intermediate standing portion 612b of the front base 612 on the standing tip side thereof. Similarly, a substantially semicircular notch portion 611b1 is formed at a position in phase with the notch portion 612b1 on the standing tip side of the intermediate standing portion 611b of the back base 611 (FIG. 33). reference).

That is, in a state where the standing tip surfaces of the intermediate standing portions 611b and 612b are overlapped with each other (that is, in the assembled state of the base member 610), the notched portions 611b1 and 612b2 form a substantially circular opening in the front view. To. These circular openings are formed at positions facing each LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 (positions having the same phase).

Therefore, the light emitted from each LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 passes through the circular openings formed by the cutout portions 611b1 and 612b1 of the intermediate standing portions 611b and 612b, and is incident on the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. Will be done. The circular opening is set to a diameter larger than the diameter of the light emitting portion of the LED 651.

Next, the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38.

FIG. 37 is a front view of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. FIG. 38 is a partial cross-sectional view of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 in the line XXXVIII-XXXVIII of FIG. 37. In FIG. 38, the boundary between the above-mentioned display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M.

As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the projection plate member 620 is formed in a circular plate-like body when viewed from the front. The projection plate member 620 includes a notch portion 621 and a reflection portion 622 that diffusely reflects light at a part of the outer edge.

The cutout portion 621 is a portion for facilitating the arrangement of the collar C on the regulation protrusion 611f of the back surface base 611, and is formed by cutting out a part of the outer edge of the projection plate member 620 in a straight line in a direction orthogonal to the radial direction. Will be done.

The reflection portion 622 is a portion where the inside of the projection plate member 620 is roughened by laser processing or the like, and the entire area of the projection plate member 620 in the front view is processed into a shape such as a pattern or a pattern. As a result, when the light incident on the inside of the projection plate member 620 is applied to the reflecting portion 622, it is diffusely reflected by the rough surface of the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the surface side of the game board.

As a result, the player can easily see the diffusely reflected light and can see the shape of the reflecting portion 622. That is, when light is incident on the projection plate member 620, the shape of the reflecting portion 622 can be displayed on the front side of the projection plate member 620.

The gear member 630 is made of a light-transmitting material having a lower refractive index than the projection plate member 620, is formed of an annular plate-like body in front view, and has an outer diameter dimension larger than that of the projection plate member 620. It is set to a large size and is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, is arranged on the back side of the front base 612). Further, the gear member 630 is arranged on the back surface side (the back side of the paper in FIG. 37) of the projection plate member 620, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620.

The gear member 630 is inclined toward the front side from the tooth portion 631 engraved along the outer peripheral surface, the back surface portion 632 on the side surface on the back surface side, and the end portion on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the back surface portion 632. The inclined surface portion 633 is provided.

As described above, the tooth portion 631 is a tooth surface to which the gear 664 is meshed, and is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the gear member 630 over the entire circumference.

The inclined surface portion 633 is a surface that is continuously provided from the end portion 634 on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the back surface portion 632 and is inclined toward the front side. Further, the inclination angle of the inclined surface portion 633 toward the front side is a virtual angle θ1 between the virtual line B connecting the light source A and the end portion 634 of the LED 651 and the back surface portion 632 extending the back surface portion 632 to the inner peripheral side. It is set to be substantially the same as the intersection angle θ2 of the line C and the inclined surface portion 633 (θ1 = θ2).
The groove forming member 640 is made of a light transmissive material having a refractive index lower than that of the projection plate member 620, is formed in an annular shape in front view, and is formed in a shape in which the cross section is bent into a substantially L shape, and the bent inside is formed. It is arranged on the projection plate member 620 side. Further, the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, is arranged on the back side of the front base 612). Further, the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the front side (upper side of FIG. 38) of the projection plate member 620, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620.

The groove forming member 640 has a side surface portion 641a on one surface of the inner portion bent in a substantially L-shaped cross section, a contact surface 641b on the other surface of the inner portion bent in a substantially L-shaped cross section, and a side surface on the front side. A front surface portion 642 and an inclined surface portion 643 inclined from an end portion on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the front surface portion 642 to the back surface side are provided.

The side surface portion 641a is a surface that sandwiches the collar C between the side surfaces of the projection plate member 620 on the front side (upper side of FIG. 38), and has a constant facing distance around the plane and the axis of the projection plate member 620 on the front side. Formed apart.

The contact surface 641b is a surface that abuts on the collar C arranged between the side surface portion 641a and the projection plate member 620 to rotatably hold the projection plate member 620, and its cross section is orthogonal to the side surface portion 641a. At the same time, it is formed in a circular shape around the axis.

Therefore, the side surface portion 641a and the contact surface 641b can be arranged on the projection plate member 620 to form a guide groove 641 for guiding the collar C. That is, the guide groove 641 is formed between the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 by assembling the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640.

The inclined surface portion 643 is a surface that is continuously provided from the end portion 644 on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the front surface portion 642 and is inclined toward the back surface side. Further, the inclination angle of the inclined surface portion 643 toward the back surface is a virtual angle θ3 between the virtual line D connecting the light source A and the end portion 644 of the LED 651 and the front portion 642 extending the front portion 642 to the inner peripheral side. It is set to be substantially the same as the intersection angle θ4 of the line E and the inclined surface portion 643 (θ3 = θ4).

Next, the projection plate member 620 and the color C will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39 (a) is a rear view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 39 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the projection unit 600 in the XXXIXb-XXXIXb line of FIG. 39 (a). 40 (a) to 40 (c) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the projection unit 600. It should be noted that FIGS. 40 (a) to 40 (c) show the transition state when the collar C is attached to the shaft portion 612f of the front base 612. Further, in FIGS. 39 and 40, a state in which the back base 611 is removed from the projection unit 600 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 39 (b), when the collar C is arranged on the shaft portion 612f, the protruding portion C1 projecting radially outward thereof is the front side (FIG. 3) of the projection plate member 620. It is arranged between the side surface of 39 (b) lower side) and the side surface portion 641a of the groove forming member 640 (guide groove 641).

Further, the distance dimension L1 between the tip surface of the protrusion C1 of the collar C and the side surface portion 641a of the groove forming member 640 is from the distance dimension L2 between the shaft portion of the collar C and the outer peripheral surface of the groove forming member 640. Is also set small (L1 <L2).

Therefore, in order to make the projection plate member 620 rotatable, when the groove forming member 640 and the collar C are arranged with a predetermined gap, the projection plate member 620 is arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions by the gap. The contact surface 641b of the groove forming member 640 can be brought into contact with the tip of the protruding portion C1 of the collar C even if the groove forming member 640 is displaced. As a result, the projection plate member 620 can be rotatably held by the tip of the protrusion C1 of the collar C, and the projection plate member 620 can be smoothly rotated.

Next, the attachment of the collar C to the shaft portion 612f of the front base 612 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 (a) to 40 (c).

As shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 40 (a), when the color C is arranged on the shaft portion 612f, the projection plate member 620 is arranged on the front base 612.

Here, the arrangement of the projection plate member 620 on the front base 612 is performed by arranging the groove forming member 640 inside the inner concave groove 612d of the front base 612. That is, the radial distance dimension of the inner concave groove 612d is formed to be larger than the radial distance dimension of the groove forming member 640, and the projection plate is formed by arranging the groove forming member 640 inside the inner concave groove 612d. The member 620 can be positioned and arranged.

Next, the projection plate member 620 is rotated to displace the notch portion 621 of the projection plate member 620 toward the shaft portion 612f on which the collar C is arranged. That is, by aligning the position of the notch portion 621 with the shaft portion 612f, the color C can be arranged on the front base 612 in the state where the projection plate member 620 is arranged.

Next, in the arrangement of the color C on the shaft portion 612f, the axis of the color C is on the back surface side (upper side in FIG. 40 (a)) with respect to the axis of the shaft portion 612f on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 40 (a)). It is done in a state of being inclined to. In this state, the shaft of the collar C is inserted into the tip of the shaft portion 612f, and the protruding portion C1 located inside the projection plate member 620 is inserted into the notch portion 621 and the guide groove 641.

From this state, as shown in FIG. 40 (b), the opposite side is rotated to the front side (lower side in FIG. 40 (b)) with the tip of the protrusion C1 located inside the projection plate member 620 as an axis. Thereby, the axis of the color C can be arranged concentrically with the axis of the shaft portion 612f.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40 (c), by displacing the collar C toward the front side (lower side in FIG. 40 (c)), the tip surface of the protrusion C1 of the collar C and the groove forming member 640 come into contact with each other. It is arranged at a position facing the surface. After that, by rotating the projection plate member 620, the collar C can be arranged inside the guide groove 641.

Here, if a groove is formed on the outer edge of the circular rotating member and a plurality of collars are arranged inside the groove, the rotating member is lifted (operated) in order to arrange the collars. There was a problem that the efficiency of assembly was poor because it was necessary to arrange the collar and both hands were used for the assembly.

On the other hand, in the projection unit 600, since the notch portion 621 is formed in the projection plate member 620, it is necessary to lift (operate) the projection plate member 620 when arranging the collar C as described above. not. Therefore, the efficiency of assembling the projection unit 600 can be improved.

By lining the back base 611 from the back side to the projection unit 600 assembled in this way, the projection unit 600 can be assembled.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43.

41 (a) to 43 (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. In addition, in FIG. 41 (b), FIG. 42 (b) and FIG. 43 (b), the illustration of the cross-sectional line is omitted for ease of understanding.

Further, in FIGS. 41 (b), 42 (b) and 43 (b), the refraction angle when the light from the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 is the present invention. Considering that it does not affect the invention, the light incident on the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is shown in a orthogonal manner. Further, in FIGS. 41 to 43, the boundary between the above-mentioned display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M.

As shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light having an irradiation angle α that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 620 is the outer edge of the projection plate member 620. It is incident from the side surface of the part. The light incident on the projection plate member 620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the side surfaces on the front side and the back side of the projection plate member 620. As a result, the light incident on the projection plate member 620 can travel from the edge side of the projection plate member 620 toward the central portion. Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is diffusely reflected by the reflecting unit 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine (upper side of FIG. 41B).

In this case, when the light traveling inside the projection plate member 620 is applied to the front surface or the back surface of the projection plate member 620 at a position where the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are adjacent to each other. It is conceivable that the amount of light traveling inside the projection plate member 620 is reduced by incident on the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 from the front or back side surface of the projection plate member 620.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 are formed of a light transmitting material having a refractive index lower than the refractive index of the amount of the light transmitting material of the projection plate member 620, the projection plate is formed. The light traveling through the member 620 is also emitted from the front surface or the back surface of the projection plate member 620 at a position where the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are adjacent to each other. It can be totally reflected on the side of the back. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the amount of light incident from the edge portion of the projection plate member 620.

That is, when the light passing through the medium having a high refractive index travels to the medium having a low refractive index, it is totally reflected without being incident on the medium having a low refractive index when the incident angle is increased. In the projection unit 600, the projection plate member 620 is formed in a plate-like body, and light is incident from the end face (edge portion) thereof, so that the incident angle of the light is sufficiently large. Therefore, light is not incident on the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 having a low bending rate from the projection plate member 620, and can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the amount of light traveling on the projection plate member 620.

Similarly, regarding the relationship between the projection plate member 620 and air, since the refractive index of air is a value sufficiently smaller than the amount of the transmissive material (refractive index 1), it proceeds inside the projection plate member 620. The light is not incident on the air (in the atmosphere) from the projection plate member 620, and can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the amount of light traveling on the projection plate member 620.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light having an irradiation angle β that irradiates the groove forming member 640 is incident on the groove forming member 640. Will be done.

The light incident on the groove forming member 640 can be reflected inside the groove forming member 640 and travel toward the axis of the projection plate member 620. In this case, at the position where the side surface of the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other (facing), the light reflected inside the groove forming member 640 can be incident on the projection plate member 620 side. ..

That is, at a position where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, the groove forming member 640 is adjacent to the air (atmosphere), so that the light radiated to the side surface can be reflected. On the other hand, at the position where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other, the light-transmitting material having a refractive index lower than the refractive index of the light-transmitting material amount of the projection plate member 620 is formed, so that the light-transmitting material is irradiated. Light can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

The light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the groove forming member 640 can be totally reflected by the inner side surface of the projection plate member 620 and proceed in the same manner as the light having an irradiation angle α. Since the reason is the same as in the case of the irradiation angle α, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle β can also pass through the projection plate member 620, be diffusely reflected by the reflecting unit 622, and be emitted to the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to increase the intensity (light amount) of the light emitted from the projection plate member 620 without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 620 or increasing the light intensity (light amount) of the LED 651 to irradiate. can.

That is, not only the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 is incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, but also the light emitted to the groove forming member 640 is incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, it is possible to improve the light collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, among the light emitted from the light source A, the light that reaches the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 620 can be increased, so that the light that is reflected by the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 is emitted. The amount of light can be increased to make patterns and patterns stand out (display) clearly. Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the LED 651, the amount of heat generated can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and devices can be suppressed.

Further, since the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612), it can be difficult for the player to see, and the appearance can be improved accordingly. It can be suppressed from getting worse.

Here, the light incident on the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is such that the groove forming member 640 is in front of the light source A in the front direction (on FIG. 42 (a)) as compared with the light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the light source A described above. The incident angle of the light when irradiating the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640 becomes smaller because the position is shifted in the direction). This makes it difficult to totally reflect the light traveling inside the groove forming member 640 on the inner side surface thereof, but at least a part of the light incident on the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is reflected. The above-mentioned state (a state in which light is reflected by the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640) can be formed.

Further, since the groove forming member 640 includes the inclined surface portion 643, the amount of light that is irradiated to the irradiation angle β and reflected on the projection plate member 620 side can be increased. That is, as described above, the inclined surface portion 643 is formed so that the intersection angle θ4 is the same as the intersection angle θ3 between the virtual line D connecting the light source A and the end portion 644 of the LED 651 and the front portion 642 (FIG. 38). (See), so after reflecting the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) toward the end portion 644, the light can be made to travel along the inclined surface portion 643, and the light having an irradiation angle β can be emitted from the projection plate member. The area reflected on the 620 side can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected on the projection plate member 620 side can be increased.

Further, since the outer diameter of the groove forming member 640 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620, the irradiation angle β from the light source A can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be easily reflected by the outer edge portion of the groove forming member 640 to be easily incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the light collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be improved accordingly.

As shown in FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light having an irradiation angle γ that irradiates the gear member 630 is incident on the gear member 630.

The light incident on the gear member 630 is reflected inside the gear member 630 and is advanced toward the axis of the projection plate member 620. In this case, at the position where the side surface of the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other (face), the light reflected from the inside of the gear member 630 can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

That is, at a position where the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, the gear member 630 is adjacent to the air (in contact with the atmosphere), so that the light emitted to the inner side surface of the gear member 630 is reflected. be able to. On the other hand, at the position where the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other, the gear member 630 is formed of a light-transmitting material having a refractive index lower than the refractive index of the light-transmitting material of the projection plate member 620. The emitted light can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

The light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the gear member 630 is totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620 and is advanced toward the axial center side of the projection plate member 620, similarly to the light at the irradiation angle α. The reason is the same as in the case of the irradiation angle α, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle γ passes through the projection plate member 620, is diffusely reflected by the reflecting unit 622, and is emitted to the front side of the game machine. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 620 or increasing the amount of light (light amount) of the LED 651 to irradiate.

That is, the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 can be incident not only on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, but also the light emitted on the gear member 630 can be incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. By that amount, the light collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be improved. Therefore, among the light emitted from the light source A, the light that reaches the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 620 can be increased, so that the amount of light that is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is emitted. Can be increased to make patterns and patterns stand out (display) clearly. Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the LED 651, the amount of heat generated can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and devices can be suppressed.

Further, since the gear member 630 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612), it can be difficult for the player to see, and the appearance is deteriorated accordingly. Can be suppressed.

Further, the light incident on the gear member 630 from the light source A is such that the gear member 630 is in the back direction with the light source A (downward in FIG. 43 (a)) as compared with the light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the light source A described above. The incident angle when irradiating the inner side surface of the gear member 630 is reduced by the amount that the position is displaced. This makes it difficult to totally reflect the light traveling inside the gear member 630 on the side surface thereof, but at least a part of the light incident on the gear member 630 from the light source A is reflected and the above-mentioned state. (A state in which light is reflected by the inner side surface of the gear member 630) can be formed.

Since the gear member 630 includes the inclined surface portion 633, the amount of light that is irradiated to the irradiation angle γ and reflected on the projection plate member 620 side can be increased. That is, as described above, the inclined surface portion 633 is formed so that the intersection angle θ2 is the same as the intersection angle θ1 between the virtual line B connecting the light source A and the end portion 634 of the LED 651 and the back surface portion 632 (FIG. 38). (See), so after reflecting the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) toward the end 634, the light can be made to travel along the inclined surface portion 633, and the light emitted to the irradiation angle γ can be emitted. The area reflected on the projection plate member 620 side can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected on the projection plate member 620 side can be increased.

Further, since the outer diameter of the gear member 630 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620, the irradiation angle β from the light source A can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be reflected by the outer edge portion of the gear member 630 to be easily incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the light collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be improved accordingly.

Next, the detailed configuration of the irradiation unit 650 and the attachment structure to the base member 610 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46.

44 (a) is a top view of the irradiation unit 650, and FIG. 44 (b) is a front view of the irradiation unit 650 in the direction of the arrow XLIVb of FIG. 44 (a). 45 (a) is a rear view of the irradiation unit 650 in the direction of arrow XLVa of FIG. 44 (a), and FIG. 45 (b) is an irradiation unit 650 in the XLVb-XLVb line of FIG. 44 (b). It is a cross-sectional view of. Note that FIGS. 44 and 45 show a state before being attached to the base member 610 (front base 612) (that is, a state in which the substrate member 652 is not elastically deformed).

As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the irradiation unit 650 is provided on a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) LEDs 651, a substrate member 652 on which the plurality of LEDs 651 are mounted on the front surface, and a back surface of the substrate member 652. A plurality of (two in this embodiment) first block 653 and second block 654 are provided.

The substrate member 652 is formed of an elastically deformable material in a horizontally long strip shape when viewed from the front. As described above, the LED 651 is a light emitting means for irradiating light for incident from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and a plurality of LEDs 651 are in a posture in which the irradiation surface is directed to the front surface of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652. They are arranged at equal intervals along (FIG. 44 (b) left-right direction).

The first block 653 and the second block 654 are members interposed between the substrate member 652 and the base member 610, and two first blocks 653 are arranged on the longitudinal center side of the substrate member 652. At the same time, the second block 654 is arranged on both sides of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction with the first block 653 interposed therebetween.

The first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape from a resin material, and have higher rigidity (characteristics that are less likely to be elastically deformed) than the substrate member 652. Therefore, in the state of being attached to the base member 610 (front base 612), only the portion of the substrate member 652 located between the adjacent blocks 653 and 654 can be elastically deformed. Here, the first block 653 and the second block 654 will be described with reference to FIG. 46.

46 (a) is a front view of the first block 653, and FIG. 46 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first block 653 in the XLVIb-XLVIb line of FIG. 46 (a). Further, FIG. 46 (c) is a front view of the second block 654, and FIG. 46 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the second block 654 in the XLVId-XLVId line of FIG. 46 (c).

The first block 653 has a front side (paper surface of FIG. 46 (a)) from a bottom wall portion 653a having a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view and a side wall portion 653b erected from four sides of the bottom wall portion 653a toward the front side. The front side) is formed in an open box shape.

Of the four side wall portions 653b, the opposite side wall portion 653b (standing from the short side of the bottom wall portion 653a) has a fastening hole h recessed in the front end surface thereof, and the screw S1 can be fastened. It is said that. Further, the side wall portions 653b different from the side wall portion 653b in which the fastening hole h is recessed are connected to each other by the connecting wall 653c, and the protrusion 653c1 is projected from the front end surface of the connecting wall 653c.

The second block 654 is located on the front side (front of the paper surface in FIG. 46 (c)) from the bottom wall portion 654a having a rectangular front view and the side wall portion 654b erected from the four sides of the bottom wall portion 654a toward the front side. The side) is formed in an open box shape. A rectangular opening 654a1 in front view is formed in the bottom wall portion 654a so that an electrical connection line can be inserted through the bottom wall portion 654a.

Of the four side wall portions 654b, the side wall portion 654b erected from the short side of the bottom wall portion 654a is provided with a fastening hole h on the front end surface thereof so that the screw S1 can be fastened. Further, the side wall portions 653b erected from the long side of the bottom wall portion 654a are connected to each other by the connecting wall 654c, and the connecting wall 654c is provided with a fastening hole h on the front end surface thereof, and the screw S1 is provided. Can be fastened.

In the first block 653 and the second block 654, insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 are bored at two locations of the side wall portions 653b and 654b which are erected from the long sides of the bottom wall portions 653a and 654a (FIG. 45). (A) and FIG. 46 (b)). The holding pin 612g of the front base 612 is inserted into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1. As a result, it is possible to position the arrangement positions of both blocks 653 and 654 with respect to the front base 612 and hold them at the arrangement positions.

The first block 653 is symmetrical with respect to the first virtual plane (that is, the virtual plane including the axes of the two fastening holes h) passing through the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46A). In addition, it is formed in a shape that passes through the center in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 46A) and is symmetrical with respect to the second virtual plane that is perpendicular to the first virtual plane.

Therefore, in the irradiation unit 650 in which the first block 653 of 2 is arranged with respect to the substrate member 620 of 1, the first block 653 can be shared, so that the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. Can be done. Further, when the first block 653 is assembled to the substrate member 620, the first block 653 has neither the vertical direction nor the longitudinal direction with respect to the substrate member 620, so that the workability at the time of assembling work is improved. Can be planned.

Similarly, the second block 654 is relative to the first virtual plane (that is, the virtual plane including the axes of the two fastening holes h) passing through the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46 (c)). It is formed in a symmetrical shape.

Therefore, in the irradiation unit 650 in which the second block 654 of the second is arranged with respect to the substrate member 620 of one, the second block 654 can be shared, so that the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. Can be done. Further, when assembling the second block 654 to the substrate member 620, the second block 654 does not have a vertical direction with respect to the substrate member 620, so that the workability at the time of assembling work is improved. Can be done.

It will be described back to FIG. 44 and FIG. 45. The first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back surface side of the substrate member 652 with their longitudinal directions along the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 and a predetermined distance from the adjacent ones. To.

Specifically, in the first block 653 and the second block 654, the front surface thereof is overlapped with the back surface of the substrate member 652, and the screw S1 inserted from the insertion hole formed in the substrate member 652 is screwed into the fastening hole h. By doing so, it is fastened and fixed to the back surface side of the substrate member 652. In this case, the protrusion 653c1 of the first block 653 is projected to the front side from the insertion hole formed in the substrate member 652.

Only the LED 651 is arranged (mounted) on the front surface of the board member 652, and other electronic components and connectors are arranged (mounted) on the back surface of the board member 652. In this case, as described above, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed in a box shape with an open front surface, and the opened side thereof is arranged so as to overlap the back surface of the substrate member 652. That is, since both blocks 652 and 654 have a recess on the surface on the side to be overlapped (arranged) on the substrate member 652, the electronic component or connector mounted on the substrate member 652 is provided in the recess (internal space). Can be accommodated. Therefore, since the electronic components and the connector can be covered and protected by both blocks 653 and 654, it is possible to prevent the electronic components and the connector from being damaged by the contact with the surrounding displaced members (for example, the projection plate member 620). can.

Further, the circuit (pattern) formed on the substrate member 652 is formed on the back surface thereof. Therefore, such a circuit can also be covered and protected by both blocks 653, 654, so that it is possible to prevent the circuit from being damaged (broken) due to contact with a surrounding displaced member (for example, a projection plate member 620). can. Further, the portion of the substrate member 652 where both blocks 652 and 654 are not arranged is elastically deformed (bent) into a curved shape that is convex toward the back surface (see FIG. 34), so that the circuit is projected accordingly. It can be separated from the plate member 620. As a result, it is possible to prevent the circuit from being damaged (disconnected) even in the portion where both blocks 652 and 654 are not arranged.

A method of arranging (assembling method) the irradiation unit 650 configured in this way on the base member 610 will be described. First, the irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the back surface of the front base 612 in the area between the intermediate standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 612c. In this case, while elastically deforming (bending) the substrate member 652, each holding pin 612g erected from the back surface of the front base 612 is inserted into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654. ..

As a result, both blocks 653, 654 (that is, the irradiation unit 650) can be held on the back surface of the front base 612, and the arrangement position of the irradiation unit 650 (that is, the irradiation direction of the LED 651) can be positioned at a predetermined position (FIG. 34). reference). After that, by superimposing the front surface of the back surface base 611 on the back surface of the front surface base 612, the irradiation unit 650 is accommodated between the facing surfaces (internal space) of both bases 611 and 612. That is, the irradiation unit 650 is arranged (assembled) on the base member 610.

In the present embodiment, in the state where the irradiation unit 650 is arranged on the base member 610, the LEDs 651 are arranged on the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction as described above. That is, not only the circumferential distance of the LED 651 in one irradiation unit 650, but also the circumferential distance of the LED 651 between the one irradiation unit 650 and the irradiation unit 650 adjacent to the one irradiation unit 650 is the same as the other. Will be done.

Here, the projection unit 600 causes the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 651 to be incident on the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, it is necessary to dispose a plurality of LEDs 651 along the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. In addition to the large number of such LEDs 651 arranged (attached), each LED 651 is arranged by adjusting the irradiation surface (irradiation direction) of each LED 651 to a posture toward the center of the projection plate member 620. It is necessary to do this, which increases the labor of the arrangement work.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since a plurality of (8 in this embodiment) LEDs 651 are mounted on the substrate member 652 formed so as to be elastically deformable, one substrate member 652 (irradiation unit 650). Is arranged (attached) to the front base 612 (base member 610), so that the arrangement work of a plurality of (8 in this embodiment) LEDs 651 can be completed at one time (see FIG. 34). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the labor of disposing the LED 651 by that amount.

Further, by inserting the holding pin 612g of the back base 612 into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654, the substrate member 652 can be held in a predetermined elastically deformed posture, and the LED 651 can be held. The direction of the irradiation surface can be specified (see FIG. 34). That is, it is not necessary to assemble a plurality of LEDs 651 to the rear base 612 while adjusting their irradiation surfaces individually, and each LED 651 can be inserted only by inserting the holding pins 612g into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of both blocks 653 and 654. Since the posture (irradiation direction) of the LED 651 can be set (adjusted), the labor of disposing (attaching) the LED 651 can be suppressed from this point as well.

In this case, the irradiation unit 650 includes a first block 653 and a second block 654 that are formed to have higher rigidity than the substrate member 652, and since both blocks 653 and 654 are held by the back surface base 612, vibration and the like occur. It is possible to easily define the posture of the substrate member 652 as a desired posture by suppressing the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 due to the external force input or by correcting the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 itself. As a result, the posture of each LED 651 can be suppressed from being affected by the warp or bending of the substrate member 652, and the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be easily maintained.

In particular, each LED 651 is arranged in the area of the substrate member 652 where the first block 653 or the second block 654 is arranged (that is, inside the area surrounded by the four side wall portions 653b and 654b in the front view). Will be set up. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 due to the input of an external force such as vibration, or it is possible to easily correct the warp or bending of the board member 652 itself, so that the posture of the board member 652 can be changed to a desired posture. It can be easily specified. As a result, the posture of each LED 651 can be more reliably suppressed from being affected by the warp or bending of the substrate member 652, the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be further maintained. It can be done easily.

Further, each LED 651 is mounted on the front surface of the substrate member 652, while the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back surface of the substrate member 652. The LED 651 can be brought closer to the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture.

Here, the LEDs 651 are arranged at equal intervals along the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction of FIGS. 44 and 45) of the substrate member 652. That is, in the state where the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the base member 610 (front base 612), the LEDs 651 can be arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 (see FIG. 34). The uniformity of the light incident from the outer peripheral surface can be ensured.

In this case, in the present embodiment, in the second block 654, one of the fastening holes h formed at the two locations is formed in the connecting wall 654c, so that the longitudinal dimension of the second block 654 is increased accordingly. Can be shortened. Further, the second block 654 is arranged on the substrate member 652 in a posture in which the side wall portion 653b where the fastening hole h is formed is on the first block 653 side. That is, the side wall portions 653b in which the fastening holes h are not formed are located on both ends in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652.

As a result, the LEDs 651 are arranged at equal intervals in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652, and while ensuring the uniformity of the light incident on the projection plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650 is arranged in the longitudinal direction (FIGS. 44 and 45 in the left-right direction). ) Can be shortened to provide a space between adjacent irradiation units 650. In this case, the shaft portion 612f can be arranged by utilizing such a space, and as a result, the distance between the LED 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be easily brought close to each other.

On the other hand, in the first block 653, since both of the fastening holes h formed at the two locations are formed in the connecting wall 654c, the distance between the fastening hole h and the LED 651 can be shortened. That is, the position of fastening and fixing the substrate member 652 to the first block 653 by the screw S1 can be brought close to the LED 651. As a result, the influence of the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 due to the input of an external force such as vibration can be made difficult to act on the LED 651, and the warp or bending of the board member 652 itself can be made particularly easy to correct in the vicinity of the LED 651. Therefore, since the posture of each LED 651 can be more reliably suppressed from being affected by the warp or bending of the substrate member 652, the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction and the direction can be further maintained. It can be done easily.

In this case, in the first block 653, since the distance between the fastening holes h formed at the two locations becomes large, the restraint of the substrate member 652 between the fastening holes h at the two locations may be weakened. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the connecting wall 653c is provided between the side wall portions 653b where the fastening hole h is formed, and the protrusion 653c1 projecting from the connecting wall 653c is inserted into the substrate member 652. Insert it through the hole. Therefore, by engaging the protrusion 653c1 and the insertion hole, it is possible to easily suppress the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 due to the input of an external force such as vibration, or it is possible to easily correct the warp or bending of the board member 652 itself. The posture of the substrate member 652 can be easily defined as a desired posture. As a result, since it is not necessary to separately provide the screw S1 and the number of parts can be reduced, the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction while reducing the product cost by that amount, and the direction thereof can be further increased. It can be easier to maintain.

Since both ends in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 (the outermost side in the longitudinal direction, the left end and the right end in FIG. 45B) are free ends (that is, they are not constrained by the second block 654), the longitudinal direction is such. The posture of the LEDs 651 located at both ends may become unstable. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back surface side of the substrate member 652, and the substrate member 652 is elastically deformed (bent) in the direction in which the arc center is located on the front surface side thereof. ) (See FIG. 34), the elastic recovery force of the substrate member 652 can act as a force in the direction of pressing the back surfaces of both ends of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction against the front surface of the second block 654. As a result, the posture of the LEDs 651 located at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 can be stabilized.

Next, the vertical displacement unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50.

FIG. 47 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 48 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800. Further, FIG. 49 is a front perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 50 is a rear perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800.

As shown in FIGS. 47 to 50, the vertical displacement unit 800 is provided on the front base 830 having a rectangular front view, the front base 820 superimposed on the front side of the back base 830, and the back side of the back base 830. A drive motor 880 to be arranged, a displacement member 850 rotated with respect to the rear base 830 and the front base 820 by the drive force of the drive motor 880, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the drive force of the drive motor 880 to the displacement member 850. It mainly includes a connecting member 870 that connects the transmission mechanism 860 and the displacement member 850, and a cover member 840 that is arranged in front of the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 and is attached to the front base 820. ..

The rear base 830 projects to the axial centers of the opening 831 in which the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860 connected to the drive motor 880 is formed to a size that allows the transmission gear 861 to be inserted, and the transmission gears 862 and 863 of the transmission mechanism 860. It mainly includes a shaft portion 832, 833 to be formed, and a back side restricting portion 834 that is projected on the front side and extended in a curved shape.

The shaft portion of the drive motor 880 attached to the rear surface side of the rear surface base 830 is inserted through the opening 831. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 880 can be transmitted to the transmission mechanism 860 arranged on the front side of the rear base 830.

Further, the opening 831 is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860. As a result, when the transmission gear 861 is damaged, the transmission gear 861 can be removed from the vertical displacement unit 800 by removing the drive motor 880 from the rear base 830. As a result, it is possible to reduce the work process of replacing parts when the transmission gear 861 is damaged.

The shaft portions 832 and 833 are shafts for the transmission gears 862 and 863 of the transmission mechanism 860, which will be described later, to be pivotally supported and rotatably held, and are formed in a columnar shape on the front side from the rear base 830.

The back side regulating portion 834 is a protrusion that regulates the displacement of the connecting member 870 to be described later in the back direction (in the back direction of the paper in FIG. 47), is projected from the front side of the back base 830, and is a connecting member 870 described later. It is extended in a curved shape along the displacement.

The front base 820 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape with a slightly larger outer shape than the back base 830. The front base 820 has a shaft support portion 821 recessed from the front side to the back side (from the front side of the paper surface to the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 47), a side wall 822 erected on the edge portion on the back surface side, and a protrusion toward the back surface side. It mainly includes a protrusion 823 to be formed, a front side regulating portion 824 extending to the back surface side and extending in a curved shape, and a bulging portion 825 protruding to the back surface side.

The shaft support portion 821 is a shaft hole into which one end of a pin member 890, which will be described later, is inserted, and is recessed in the lower right side of the front base 820 in the front view.

The side wall 822 is a wall portion for forming a gap for arranging the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 described later between the back surface base 830 and the front base 820, and the thickness of the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction. It is erected on the upper and left and right (other than the lower end) edges of the front base 820 with dimensions larger than the dimensions. Thereby, when the front base 820 and the back base 830 are fastened, the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be arranged in a displaceable state between them.

The protrusion 823 is a protrusion to which one end side (upper side of FIG. 48) of the urging spring SP, which will be described later, is engaged, and is formed in a columnar shape and is formed so as to protrude on the back surface side of the front base 820.

The front side regulating portion 824 is a protrusion that regulates the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front direction (the direction toward the front of the paper in FIG. 47), is projected from the back side of the front base 820, and is along the displacement of the connecting member 870. It is extended in a curved shape.

The bulging portion 825 is a protruding wall arranged laterally adjacent to the urging spring SP described later at a predetermined distance, and is formed so as to project from the lower end portion of the front base 820 toward the back surface side.

The transmission mechanism 860 is a gear train composed of transmission gears 861 to 863, and by meshing with each other in series, the driving force applied from the drive motor 880 is transmitted via the transmission gears 861 and 862. Is transmitted to.

The transmission gear 863 includes a tooth portion 863a that meshes with the transmission gear 862, a shaft portion 863b that is connected to the connecting member 870, a protrusion portion 863c that projects in an arc shape centered on the shaft, and a rotation position thereof. Mainly includes a plate-shaped sensor detection plate 863d for detecting the above.

The tooth portion 863a is a tooth mating surface formed on about two-thirds of the circular side surface of the transmission gear 863, whereby the driving force can be transmitted from the transmission gear 862 to the transmission gear 863.

The shaft portion 863b is a shaft connected to the connecting member 870, and is projected in a columnar shape on the back surface side, and the shaft is arranged at a position (eccentric position) different from the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 863.

The projecting portion 863c is a protrusion for suppressing the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front direction, is formed so as to protrude from the outer edge portion on the back surface side of the transmission gear 863, and is centered on the axis of the transmission gear 863. It is formed by bending into a circular shape.

The sensor detection plate 863d is a plate that blocks the detection area of the position detection sensor (not shown) arranged on the front base in order to detect the rotational position of the transmission gear 863, and the tooth portion 863a of the transmission gear 863 is formed. It is formed so as to project radially outward on the side surface that is not.

The connecting member 870 is a member that transmits the rotational driving force of the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850, is formed by being curved in a substantially C shape in front view, and is formed in the front-rear direction at one end of the curved shape (upper end of FIG. 48). The gear-side connecting hole 871 formed through and the displacement-side connecting hole 872 formed through the other end of the curved shape (lower end in FIG. 48) in the front-rear direction, and the contact formed so as to project upward from the outside of the curved portion. A unit 873 is provided.

The gear-side connecting hole 871 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 863b. As a result, the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 can be connected, and the driving force of the transmission gear 863 can be transmitted to the connecting member 870.

The displacement-side connecting hole 872 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 853. As a result, the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 can be connected, and the driving force of the connecting member 870 can be transmitted to the displacement member 850.

The contact portion 873 is a protrusion for regulating the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the front-rear direction, and the tip thereof is arranged between the back side regulating portion 834 of the back base 830 and the front side regulating portion 824 of the front base 820. Will be done.

Further, the width dimension of the tip of the contact portion 873 in the front-rear direction is slightly smaller than the distance dimension between the back side regulation portion 834 of the back base 830 and the front side regulation portion 824 of the front base 820. It is formed. Therefore, when the connecting member 870 is displaced, the contact portion 873 is displaced in the gap between the back side regulating portion 834 and the front side regulating portion 824, so that the resistance when the connecting member 870 is displaced is large. It can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the connecting member 870 is displaced in the front-rear direction, the displacement of the connecting member 870 can be stabilized by abutting on the front base 820 or the back base 830.

The cover member 840 is a member that holds one end side (right end portion in FIG. 47) of the displacement member 850, is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in front view, and is fastened to the front base 820 with a pin member 890 in between. .. Further, the cover member 840 is formed with a shaft support portion 841 recessed in a circular shape from the back surface side to the front surface side.

The shaft support portion 841 is a groove that holds (shaft support) the pin member 890 in a rotatable state by inserting an end portion on the front side of the pin member 890, and is a position facing the shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820. Is formed in. As a result, since the pin member 890 is arranged between the shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820 and the shaft support portion 841 of the cover member 840, it is possible to prevent the pin member 890 from falling off from the vertical displacement unit 800.

The displacement member 850 is a member whose front side is decorated, and one end side (right side in FIG. 47) is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and the other end side (left side in FIG. 47) is formed in a circular shape in front view. The displacement member 850 is formed to include a shaft hole 851 through which the pin member 890 is inserted, a protrusion 852 to which the urging spring SP is connected, and a shaft portion 853 to transmit the driving force of the connecting member 870.

As described above, the shaft hole 851 is a through hole through which the pin member 890 is inserted, and is formed through the one end side of the displacement member in the front-rear direction, and its inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the pin member 890. Is also formed large. Therefore, in the displacement member 850, with the pin member 890 inserted through the shaft hole 851, the pin member 890 is arranged between the shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820 and the shaft support portion 841 of the cover member 840. The displacement member 850 can be arranged in front of the front base 820 so as to be rotatable about the axis of the shaft hole 851.

The protrusion 852 is a protrusion to which the other end (lower end of FIG. 50) of the urging spring SP is engaged, and is formed so as to protrude from the back surface side of the displacement member 850. Further, the protrusion 852 is formed at a position where the displacement member 850 projects from below the protrusion 823 of the front base 820 toward the back side when the displacement member 850 is arranged on the front base 820, and the protrusion distance thereof is the front side of the back base. It is formed up to a position that almost coincides with the side surface of. Therefore, the longitudinal direction of the urging spring SP can be made parallel to the direction of gravity. As a result, the displacement member 850 is always urged upward in the direction of gravity with respect to the front base 820.

As described above, the shaft portion 853 is a shaft inserted into the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870, and is below the front base 820 when the displacement member 850 is arranged on the front base 820 (FIG. 50). A protrusion is formed at the position (lower side). Therefore, the displacement member 850 and the connecting member 870 can be connected, and the driving force of the displacement member 850 can be transmitted to the connecting member 870.

As described above, the pin member 890 is a shaft inserted into the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850, and is formed of a metal rod-like body having a hardness higher than that of the displacement member 850. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotating shaft from being damaged when a force is applied to the rotating shaft when the displacement member 850 is displaced.

Further, the resistance of the shaft portion when the displacement member 850 rotates, the resistance when the pin member 890 rotates with respect to the respective shaft support portions 821, 841, and the resistance when the displacement member 850 rotates with respect to the pin member 890. Since it can be divided into two parts, the resistance can be prevented from being damaged due to the increase in the resistance at one place.

Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 800 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 56. 51 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the first position, FIG. 52 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the intermediate position, and FIG. 53 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the second position. Is.

54 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the first position, FIG. 55 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the intermediate position, and FIG. 56 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the second position. Is. It should be noted that FIGS. 54 to 56 show a state in which the back base 830 is removed for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 51 and 54, in the state where the other end side (left side of FIG. 52) of the displacement member 850 is arranged upward (first position), the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is arranged upward. A connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is arranged above. As a result, the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted into the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870 is arranged upward, so that the displacement member 850 is lifted upward.

Further, at the first position, a straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the shaft portion 863b was connected to the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870. The straight line is arranged on the same straight line.

Therefore, at the first position, the displacement member 850 can form a state (that is, a dead center) in which the force component in the direction of pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 to rotate the transmission gear 863 is not generated. As a result, after the displacement member 850 is arranged at the first position, it is possible to suppress the rattling of the displacement member 850 and improve the durability.

From the states shown in FIGS. 51 and 54, power is supplied to the drive motor 880 to rotationally drive the drive motor 880, and when each transmission gear 861,862,863 (transmission mechanism 860) is rotated, the transmission gear 863 The shaft portion 863b is displaced downward. Therefore, the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is pushed downward as the shaft portion 863b is rotationally driven. As a result, the displacement-side connecting hole 872 formed on the other end side (lower side of FIGS. 54 and 55) of the connecting member 870 pushes down the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850, and the displacement member 850 can be rotated.

In this case, by rotating the transmission gear 863, the straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the shaft portion 863b, and the displacement of the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870. It is assumed that the straight line connecting the side connecting holes 872 has a tolerance. Therefore, the displacement member 850 can release the state (that is, the dead center) in which the force component in the direction of pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 to rotate the transmission gear 863 is not generated. As a result, when the transmission gear 863 starts to rotate in the rotation direction (rotation to the right in FIG. 54) that displaces the displacement member 850, the force of pulling the gear side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 780 by the gravity of the displacement member 850 is applied. , The transmission gear 863 can be applied in the direction of rotation. As a result, the energy consumption of the drive motor 880 when displaced from the first position can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 and 55, power is supplied to the drive motor 880 after the displacement member 850 is displaced from the state shown in FIGS. 51 and 54 (that is, the state located at the dead center). I will explain when is turned off.

As shown in FIGS. 52 and 55, in a state where the power supply to the drive motor 880 is turned off after the displacement from the first position, the axis (rotation center) of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft of the transmission gear 863. At a position where the direction connecting the portion 863b and the direction connecting the gear side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 and the displacement side connecting hole 872 are substantially orthogonal to each other, the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elastic recovery of the urging spring SP It is considered to be in a state where the force is balanced (intermediate position).

Therefore, when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the first position to the second position described later, the power supply to the drive motor 880 is turned off so that the displacement member 850 is centered on the intermediate position (balanced position). The displacement member 850 can be made to perform a reciprocating displacement due to the acting weight and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP. That is, the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the gravity direction can be regarded as the normal projection motion of the constant velocity circular motion, and the displacement velocity can be changed, so that the displacement member can be displaced in an interesting manner.

On the other hand, if power is supplied to the drive motor 880 and a driving force is applied from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850 via the connecting member 870, the displacement is different from the above-mentioned displacement (normal projection motion of constant velocity circular motion). In the embodiment, the displacement member 850 can be displaced between the first position and the second position, and the variation of the displacement can be increased accordingly. That is, by simply turning on or off the power supply to the drive motor 880 and switching whether or not to apply the driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850, the variation of displacement can be increased, and the structure and control can be controlled. Since it does not need to be complicated, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the reliability.

Further, as described above, since the displacement member 850 is subjected to rotational displacement about the shaft hole 851, the application of the driving force of the displacement member 850 is released from the transmission mechanism 860, and the action of the gravity of the displacement member 850 is released. When the displacement member 850 is subjected to a reciprocating displacement due to the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP, the displacement on the other end side (left side of FIG. 52) of the displacement member 850 is not limited to the linear motion in the vertical direction. The displacement can be combined with the rotational movement centered on the shaft hole 851. As a result, the displacement member 850 can be displaced in an interesting manner.

In this case, the connecting member 870 connected to the displacement member 850 is pushed and pulled (displaced in the vertical direction) with the displacement of the displacement member 850 to rotate the transmission gear 863, and the transmission gear is rotated with the push and pull. Since the posture of the 863 is changed, the magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member in the push-pull direction can be changed. That is, when the displacement member 850 is reciprocally displaced, the magnitude of the resistance received by the displacement member 850 from the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be changed. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850, and it is possible to make the displacement member perform an interesting displacement.

Further, as described above, in a state where the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP are balanced (intermediate position), the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 Since the straight line connecting the axes and the straight line connecting the axes of the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 and the axis of the displacement-side connecting hole 872 are located at substantially orthogonal positions, the force in the push-pull direction is applied. The magnitude of the force component in the direction in which the transmission gear 863 is rotated is maximized at the equilibrium position (intermediate position), and the force component can be reduced in any direction of pushing or pulling from the equilibrium position. .. That is, when the displacement member 850 is reciprocally displaced, the resistance received by the displacement member 850 from the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be changed substantially symmetrically with respect to the equilibrium position, so that the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850 can be performed. Can be easily continued.

From the state shown in FIGS. 52 and 55, when power is supplied to the drive motor 880 and each transmission gear 861,862,863 (transmission mechanism 860) is further rotated, the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is further lowered. Is displaced to. Therefore, the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is further pushed downward as the shaft portion 863b is driven to rotate. As a result, the displacement-side connecting hole 872 formed on the other end side of the connecting member 870 can push down the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 to rotate the displacement member 850.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 56, in the state where the other end side (left side of FIG. 53) of the displacement member 850 is arranged in the descending position (second position), the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is arranged downward. , The connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is arranged below. As a result, the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted into the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870 is arranged downward, so that the displacement member 850 can be in a downwardly depressed posture.

Further, in the second position, the straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863, the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863, and the displacement side connection of the connecting member 870 are connected. The straight line connecting the axial centers of the holes 872 is arranged in the same straight line length.

Therefore, at the second position, the displacement member 850 can form a state (that is, a dead center) in which the force component in the direction of pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 to rotate the transmission gear 863 is not generated. As a result, after the displacement member 850 is arranged at the second position, the rattling of the displacement member 850 can be suppressed and the durability can be improved.

Next, the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 will be described with reference to FIG. 57. 57 (a) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 at the first position, and FIG. 57 (b) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 at the intermediate position, FIG. 57. (C) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 at the second position. In FIGS. 57 (a) to 57 (c), a part of the transmission gear 863 (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 located in front of the connecting member 870) is shown by a broken line.

As shown in FIG. 57 (a), in the first position, the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 is arranged at a position facing the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, since the gap in the front-rear direction of the connecting member 870 arranged between the rear base 830 and the transmission gear 863 can be reduced, the connecting member 870 can be easily brought into contact with the rear base 830 or the transmission gear 863.

Therefore, in the first position, the resistance when driving the displacement member 850 can be increased. As a result, in the first position, it is preferable that the displacement member 850 is arranged above and the displacement member 850 is stopped in order to form a retracted state in which the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player. However, the resistance for driving the displacement member 850 can be increased to facilitate the maintenance of the stopped state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 57 (b) and 57 (c), a state in which electric power is applied to the drive motor 880 and the transmission gear 863 is rotated by a certain amount or more (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 is second. In the state of driving the drive range θ6), the connecting member 870 and the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 are not opposed to each other in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated more than a certain amount, the gap in the front-rear direction of the connecting member 870 arranged between the transmission gear 863 and the rear base 830 can be increased, so that the resistance when the connecting member 870 is displaced can be increased. Can be made smaller.

Therefore, when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the first position to the second position, it is preferable to displace it in front of the third symbol display device 81 in a short time, but the resistance to displace the connecting member 870 is reduced. , The displacement member 850 can be displaced from the first position to the second position in a short time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (c), at the second position, the contact portion 873c of the connecting member 870 can be brought into contact with the tooth portion 863a of the transmission gear 863.

Here, when the displacement member that is displaced vertically is displaced downward and stopped, the gravity of the displacement member is added to the inertial force at the time of stop, so that the displacement member cannot be stopped quickly. was there.

On the other hand, in the vertical displacement unit 800, when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the contact portion 873c of the connecting member 870 can be brought into contact with the transmission gear 863, so that the displacement member 850 is displaced. The force for stopping the displacement is two: a force that is stopped when the connecting member 870 comes into contact with the transmission gear 863 and a force that is stopped by stopping the rotation of the transmission gear 863 (driving the drive motor 880). It can be dispersed into one. As a result, the displacement member 850 displaced from the first position to the second position of the displacement member 850 can be quickly stopped at the second position.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (c), the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 when displaced from the first position will be described. 58 (a) to 58 (c) are rear views of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the first drive range θ5. It should be noted that FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (c) show the transition state from the first position. Further, in FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (c), a part of the transmission gear 863 (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 located in front of the connecting member 870) is shown by a broken line.

As shown in FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (c), when the transmission gear 863 is rotated and the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 displaces the first drive range θ5, it is second from the first position. As the displacement to the position, the portion where the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 face each other can be reduced.

Therefore, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated from the first position, the resistance that displaces the displacement member 850 can be reduced with the displacement, so that the displacement member 850 can be smoothly displaced.

Further, when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the second position to the first position, the sliding resistance of the displacement member 850 can be increased while being displaced to the first position of the retracted position, so that the displacement member 850 is first. When the displacement member 850 is displaced to a position and stopped, the displacement member 850 can be quickly stopped.

That is, when the displacement member 850 is displaced and stopped, it is difficult to quickly form a stopped state due to the inertial force for stopping the operation, but the resistance of the displacement member 850 at the time of stopping can be increased, so that the stopped state is quickly formed. can do.

On the other hand, when the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 displaces the second drive range θ6, the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 are not arranged at positions facing each other in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the resistance for displacement of the displacement member 850 can be reduced. As a result, when the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 drives the second drive range θ6, the displacement member 850 can be quickly displaced, and the effect of the overhanging operation of the displacement member 850 can be enhanced.

Further, in the second drive range θ6, when the driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850 is released and the displacement member 850 is reciprocated with the displacement member 850 as the center of the intermediate position (balanced position), the protrusion is provided. It is possible to avoid the generation of resistance by the portion 863c and smoothly perform the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850.

Next, the contact portion 873, the front base 820, and the back base 830 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 (a) to 59 (c). 59 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 54, and FIG. 59 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 55. FIG. 59 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the LIXc-LIXc line of FIG. 56.

As shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), the tip of the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 is between the front side regulating portion 824 of the front base 820 and the back side regulating portion 834 of the back base 830. Is placed in.

That is, the front side regulating portion 824 of the front base 820 and the back side regulating portion 834 of the back base 830 are formed in a curved shape due to the displacement of the tip of the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870. As a result, the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction is restricted.

Here, since the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 are in a state where the shaft portion 853 is inserted into the displacement side connecting hole 872, the displacement member 850 is tilted in the front-rear direction by the amount of the gap between the shaft and the hole. As a result, there is a problem that the displacement side connecting hole 872 or the shaft portion 853 is deformed.

On the other hand, since the vertical displacement unit 800 is suppressed from being tilted in the front-rear direction by the contact portion 873, the displacement member 850 can be smoothly displaced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (c), when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the rear side restricting portion 834 of the rear base 830 faces the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870. It can be in a state where it is not placed in.

As a result, the gap between the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 at the second position and the front base 820 and the back base 830 can be increased. As a result, the resistance when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the second position to the first position can be reduced, and the displacement member 850 can be easily displaced from the second position.

Further, the vertical displacement unit 800 is on a substantially straight line in which the contact portion 873 connects the axial center of the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 and the axial center of the gear side connecting hole of the connecting member 870, and the transmission gear 863 and It is arranged on the side opposite to the axis of the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 with the axis of the gear-side connecting hole of the connecting member 870 interposed therebetween (see FIG. 54).

Therefore, when the connecting member 870 rattles with respect to the front base 820 and the back base 830, the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 is brought into contact with the front base 820 and the back base 830, whereby the shaft of the transmission gear 863 is shafted. It is possible to easily suppress the inclination of the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the portion 863b and the connecting member 870. As a result, the driving force of the driving motor 880 can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member 850 via the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63. In the first embodiment, the outer diameter dimension of the projection plate member 620 is set smaller than that of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640, but in the second embodiment, the outer diameter dimension of the projection plate member 620 is set. It is set to be the same as the outer diameter dimension of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640.

First, the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

60 (a) is a front view of the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 60 (b) is a projection on the LXb-LXb line of FIG. 60 (a). It is sectional drawing of the plate member 2620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640.

As shown in FIGS. 60A and 60B, a gear member 630 and a groove forming member 2640 are arranged on the back surface side and the front surface side, respectively, on the outer peripheral edge portion of the projection plate member 2620. The projection plate member 2620 is formed in a circular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and its outer diameter is formed to be the same as the outer diameter of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640. Further, the projection plate member 2620 includes a notch portion 621 and a reflection portion 622 that diffusely reflects light in a part of the outer edge.

The groove forming member 2640 is made of a light transmissive material having a refractive index lower than that of the projection plate member 2620, and is formed in an annular shape in front view and has a U-shape whose cross section is concave from the outer edge side to the inner edge side. The guide groove 2641 is provided. Further, the groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the front side (upper side of FIG. 60B) of the projection plate member 2620, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 2620. Further, the groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the hidden region side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612).

The guide groove 2641 is a groove for guiding the collar C inward, and the recessed width is formed to be larger than the axial dimension of the protruding portion C1 of the collar C. Therefore, the projection plate member 2620 is rotatably held by the base member 610 by guiding the plurality of collars C rotatably supported by the base member 610 to the guide groove 2641.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63.

61 to 63 are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640. In addition, in FIG. 61 (b), FIG. 62 (b) and FIG. 63 (b), the illustration of the cross-sectional line is omitted for the sake of easy understanding.

Further, in FIGS. 61 (b), 62 (b), and 63 (b), light from the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640, as in the first embodiment. The refraction angle at the time of this is considered to have no effect on the present invention, and the light incident on the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640 from the light source A is shown in a orthogonal manner. Further, in FIGS. 61 to 63, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by the virtual line M, as in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light having an irradiation angle α2 that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 2620 is the outer edge of the projection plate member 620. It is incident from the side surface of the part. The light incident on the projection plate member 2620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the side surfaces on the front side and the back side of the projection plate member 2620. As a result, the light incident on the projection plate member 2620 can travel from the edge side of the projection plate member 2620 toward the central portion (axis center). Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is diffusely reflected by the reflecting unit 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine.

In this case, the projection plate member 2620 is formed to have a larger outer dimension than the projection plate member 620 in the first embodiment. Thereby, the edge portion of the projection plate member 2620 can be arranged near the LED 651 (light source A). Therefore, since the irradiation angle α2 of the second embodiment can be made larger than the irradiation angle α1 of the first embodiment, the amount of light (light amount) projected on the projection plate member 2620 can be increased accordingly. can. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 2620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the amount of light emitted by the LED 651.

As shown in FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the irradiation that irradiates the groove forming member 640 on the front side (upper side of FIG. 62 (a)) from the guide groove 641. Light at an angle β2 is incident on the front edge of the groove forming member 2640.

The light irradiated in the range of the irradiation angle β2 and incident on the groove forming member 2640 is reflected inside the groove forming member 2640 and travels toward the axial center side of the projection plate member 2620. In this case, as in the first embodiment, at the position where the side surface of the groove forming member 2640 and the projection plate member 2620 are adjacent to each other (facing), the light radiated to the inner side surface of the groove forming member 2640 is emitted to the projection plate member 2620. Can be incident on.

As shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the groove forming member 2640 on the back surface side (lower side of FIG. 62 (a)) of the guide groove 641 is irradiated. The light having the irradiation angle Δ2 is incident from the back surface side edge of the groove forming member 2640.

The light irradiated in the range of the irradiation angle Δ2 and incident on the groove forming member 2640 is reflected on the side surface of the guide groove 2641 of the groove forming member 2640. The reflected light can be incident on the projection plate member 2620 by irradiating the side surface of the groove forming member 2640 and the side surface at the position where the projection plate member 2620 is adjacent (facing).

That is, by denting the guide groove 2641 on the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, the light incident on the groove forming member 2640 from between the guide groove 2641 and the projection plate member 2620 is transmitted to the side surface of the guide groove 2641. It can be reflected and incident on the projection plate member 2620.

Therefore, by forming the guide groove 2641 by recessing it on the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, the role of holding the color C and the role of collecting light on the projection plate member 2620 can be combined. ..

Further, as compared with the first embodiment, the amount of light (light amount) incident on the projection plate member 2620 from the groove forming member 2640 can be increased by the amount of the irradiation angle Δ added. Therefore, it is possible to increase the intensity (light amount) of the light emitted from the projection plate member 2620 without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the light intensity (light amount) of the LED 651 to irradiate. ..

Further, since the groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612), it can be difficult for the player to see, and the appearance can be improved accordingly. It can be suppressed from getting worse.

Of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light irradiating the gear member 630 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. In the first embodiment, the state in which the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are in contact with each other over the entire circumference of the outer edge portion of the projection plate member 620 has been described, but the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 in the third embodiment have been described. , A floating surface is formed with respect to the projection plate member 3620.

First, the shapes of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

64 (a) is a front view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 64 (b) is a projection on the LXIVb-LXIVb line of FIG. 64 (a). It is sectional drawing of the plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640.

65 (a) is a side view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 in the direction of the arrow LXV of FIG. 64 (a), and FIG. 65 (b) is a side view of FIG. 65 (a). It is sectional drawing of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 in the LXVb-LXVb line, and FIG. 65 (c) is the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 in the LXVc-LXVc line of FIG. And is a cross-sectional view of the groove forming member 640.

As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the projection plate member 3620 according to the third embodiment is formed into a plate-like body having a circular front view, and a gear member 3630 and a groove forming member 3640 are formed on the outer peripheral edge thereof on the back side and the front surface. It is arranged on each side. Further, the projection plate member 3620 has an outer diameter larger than that of the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, and a protrusion 3623 projecting to the front side and the back side is formed on the outer edge portion thereof.

The protrusion 3623 is formed in a substantially triangular cross section protruding toward the front side (upper side in FIG. 64 (b)) or the back side (lower side in FIG. 64 (b)) toward the outer edge portion. Further, the protrusion 3623 projecting to the front side is set on the line of the virtual line F whose tip portion connects the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge end portion of the concave groove 3645 formed in the groove forming member 3640 described later. Will be done. On the other hand, the protruding portion 3623 protruding to the back side is set on the line of the virtual line G whose tip portion connects the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge end portion of the concave groove 3635 formed in the gear member 3630 described later. To.

The gear member 3630 is formed in an annular plate shape in front view, and is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620. Further, the gear member 3630 is screwed through a concave groove 3635 which is recessed on the side surface on the front side (upper side of FIG. 64 (b)) at a predetermined interval and is formed through the groove 3635 at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction. A stop hole 636 for use is provided.

The concave groove 3635 is a groove recessed in the radial direction, and is formed on both sides of each stop hole 636. Thereby, when the gear member 3630 is arranged on the projection plate member 3620, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 (see FIG. 64 (b)).

The groove forming member 3640 is formed in a plate-like body having an annular shape in front view, and is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620. Further, the groove forming member 3640 is formed through the concave groove 3645 which is recessed on the side surface of the back surface side (lower side in FIG. 64B) at a predetermined interval and the groove forming member 3645 at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction. It is provided with an opening 646 for screwing.

The concave groove 3645 is a groove recessed in the radial direction, and is formed at a position facing the concave groove 3636 formed in the gear member 3630. Thereby, when the groove forming member 3640 is arranged on the projection plate member 3620, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 65, the surface on which the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 are in contact with each other has an opening 646 into which the bolt T for fastening the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is inserted. It is a surface that overlaps in the radial direction. As a result, when a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the holding force. That is, when forming a gap between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640 can be grounded by the diameter of the opening 646. Therefore, it is possible to secure a holding surface for sandwiching the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIG. 66.

66 (a) and 66 (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of a projection plate member 620, a gear member 630, and a groove forming member 640. In FIG. 66 (b), the cross-sectional line is omitted for ease of understanding.

Further, in FIG. 66 (b), as in the first embodiment, the refraction angle when the light from the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 has an influence on the present invention. The light incident on the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 from the light source A is shown in an orthogonal manner. Further, in FIG. 66, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M as in the first embodiment.

Of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 as shown in FIGS. 66A and 66B, the light having an irradiation angle α3 that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 3620 is the outer edge of the projection plate member 3620. It is incident from the side.

The light incident on the projection plate member 3620 is totally reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the side surfaces on the front side and the back side of the projection plate member 3620. As a result, the light incident on the projection plate member 3620 can travel from the edge portion of the projection plate member 3620 toward the center side (axis center side). Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α3 passes through the projection plate member 3620, is diffusely reflected by the reflecting unit 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine.

In this case, in the third embodiment, since a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630, the light incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 3620 is reflected by the reflecting portion 622. Can be easily reached. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 3620 can be easily reached to the reflecting portion 622. Therefore, the light reflected by the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 3620 is strengthened to make the pattern. And patterns can be clearly highlighted.

On the other hand, the light irradiated to the irradiation angle other than the irradiation angle α3 is incident on the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630. In this case, since the groove forming member 3640, the gear member 3630, and the projection plate member are arranged with a gap as described above, the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630 is first executed. It is not incident on the projection plate member 620 side as in the form.

Therefore, the light of the light source other than the light source A of the LED 651 is projected onto the projection plate member 3620 side, and the light is incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630, so that the light of the light source other than the light source A is applied to the projection plate member 3620. Can be suppressed from being incident. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display applied to the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 3620 from appearing (displayed) by light other than the LED 651.

Further, as described above, since the ground contact surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is a surface that radially overlaps the opening 646 (see FIG. 65 (c)), it is usually used. A place where light is not incident can be a ground plane.

That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646, when light is incident from the radial outside of the opening 646, the light is blocked by the bolt T and the light of the LED 651 is not incident on the reflecting portion 622 side. Therefore, it is possible to reliably suppress that the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from the LED 651 is incident on the projection plate member 3620 side.

Further, in this case, since the ground contact surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 can be formed over the entire surface overlapping the opening 646 in the radial direction, the ground contact surface can be secured and the projection can be performed. It is possible to prevent the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from shifting with respect to the plate member 3620.

Here, if a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630, the light of the LED 651 is inserted into the axial center side of the projection plate member 3620 from the gap. There was a risk that light would leak from the edges of the projection plate member 3620 to the center.

On the other hand, since the protrusion 3623 is formed at the edge of the projection plate member 3620 of the third embodiment, the light of the light source A of the LED 651 is connected to the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630. The gap is not irradiated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent light from leaking from the edge portion of the projection plate member 3620 to the central portion.

Further, since the protrusion 3623 makes it possible to lengthen the dimension of the side surface of the edge portion of the projection plate member 3620 in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 66A), the angle of the irradiation angle α3 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the intensity (light amount) of the light emitted from the projection plate member 3620 without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 3620 or increasing the light intensity (light amount) of the LED 651 to irradiate. ..

Next, the irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. The same parts as those of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 67 (a) is a top view of the irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 67 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the irradiation unit 4650. Further, FIG. 68 (a) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit 4600 in the vicinity of the first block 653, and FIG. 68 (b) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit 4600 in the vicinity of the second block 654. Note that FIG. 67 (b) corresponds to FIG. 44 (b). Further, in FIG. 68, a state in which the irradiation unit 4650 is arranged on the base member 610 is schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 67, in the irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are fastened and fixed to the substrate member 620 by screws S2. In this case, the height dimension of the head of the screw S2 (vertical dimension in FIG. 67) is set to be larger than the height dimension of the LED 651. That is, the amount of protrusion of the screw S2 from the front surface of the substrate member 620 is made larger than the amount of protrusion of the LED 651.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 68, the height dimension of the head of the screw S2 is such that the projection plate member 620 is placed on the head of one screw S2 and the screw S2 adjacent to the one screw S2. When the outer peripheral surface is abutted (external), the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 is set to a size that cannot be contacted with the LED 651 arranged between the two screws S2.

Thereby, the LED 651 can be protected by the head of the screw S2. That is, when the projection plate member 620 is rotated, for example, when it is brought close to the irradiation unit 2650 due to radial rattling based on dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances, the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 is screwed. By contacting the head of S2, contact with the LED 651 can be avoided, and as a result, damage to the LED 651 can be suppressed.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the projection plate member 620 is formed of a resin material, whereas the screw S2 is formed of a metal material, so that the LED 651 is protected when the projection plate member 620 rattles in the radial direction. Can enhance the effect of Further, when the projection plate member 620 is continuously rotated while being in contact with the screw S2, the projection plate member 620 is worn, so that the projection plate member 620 rattles in the radial direction. Also, it is possible to avoid contact with the LED 651.

As described above, since the LED 651 can be protected by using the screw S2, the formation of the intermediate standing portions 611b and 612b can be omitted. Therefore, in this case, since the complicated shape can be omitted, the shapes of the back base 611 and the front base 612 can be simplified, and the moldability in the resin molding can be improved. As a result, the yield can be improved.

Further, since the LED 651 can be protected by using the screw S2, the allowable amount of radial rattling due to the dimensional tolerance and the assembly tolerance of the parts can be relaxed, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased. That is, the LED 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be brought closer to each other, and as a result, the light emitted from the LED 651 can be efficiently incident on the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620.

Next, the projection unit 5600 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 76. In the first embodiment, the case where the projection plate member 620 is formed in the shape of a front view disk and is rotated about the center of the circle has been described. However, in the fifth embodiment, the projection plate member 5620 is a vertically long rectangle in front view. The case where it is formed in the above direction and is slid and displaced in one direction will be described.

First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 69 is a front view of the projection unit 5600 according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 70 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit 5600. FIG. 71 is a rear view of the front base 5612. FIG. 72 is a rear view of the projection unit 5600. Note that FIG. 72 shows a state in which the back base 5611 is removed.

As shown in FIGS. 69 to 72, the projection unit 5600 is arranged so as to be slidably displaceable in the base member 5610 which is formed in a front view circular shape and whose central portion is open and the opening portion of the base member 5610. The projection plate member 5620, the irradiation unit 650 for incident light from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 5620, the drive motor 661 for sliding displacement of the projection plate member 5620, and the drive force of the drive motor 661 are transferred to the projection plate member. It is mainly provided with a gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668) for transmitting to the 5620.

The base member 5610 is formed in a circular shape in front view, and is arranged in front of the back base 5611 having a horizontally long rectangular opening at the center thereof and the back base 5611 having substantially the same outer shape as the back base 5611. The front base 5612 is provided, and the projection plate member 5620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5665) are provided in the internal space formed between the facing surfaces of the back base 5611 and the front base 5612. 5668) is stored.

As described above, the front base 5612 is a plate member formed in a circular shape in front view, and has an outer standing portion 612c erected on the outer edge portion on the back side and an opening in a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view in the center portion. The central opening 5612h to be formed, the inner standing portion 612a erected on the back side edge of the central opening 5612h, and a pair of left and right holding portions 5612i protruding from the upper ends of the central opening 5612h. It is mainly provided with two shaft portions 5612k formed so as to project from between the pair of holding portions 5612i to the back surface side, and a sliding projection 5612 m formed to project from below the central opening portion 5612h to the back surface side. Rectangle.

The central opening 5612h is opened in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the central portion of the front base 5612 in front view. The player can visually recognize the pattern or symbol of the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back side of the projection unit 5600 through the central opening 5612h.

The holding portion 5612i is a protruding portion for holding the rod member 5625, which will be described later, and is formed so as to protrude on the back side (front side of the paper surface of FIG. 71) of the front base 5612 at both upper ends of the central opening portion 5612h. Further, the holding portion 5612i is formed with a concave groove 5612i1 which is recessed on the protruding surface thereof on the front side (the back side of the paper surface of FIG. 71).

The concave groove 5612i1 is recessed in a cross-sectional arc shape from the central portion of the front base 5612 in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 71) toward the end side, and the inner diameter of the concave groove 5612i1 is the outer diameter of the rod member 5625 described later. Is formed larger than. Further, the pair of concave grooves 5612i1 are formed at the same height in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 71), and the distance dimension between the ends in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 71) is the axis of the rod member 5625. It is set larger than the directional dimension. Therefore, after the rod member 5625 is arranged on the inner peripheral surface of the concave groove 5612i1, a groove having a radius larger than the outer diameter of the rod member 5625 is located at a position facing the concave groove 5612i1 from the back surface side (front side of the paper in FIG. 71). By disposing the holding portion cover 5628 provided with the above at both ends, the rod member 5625 can be arranged on the front base 5612 (see FIG. 72).

The shaft portion 5612k is a protrusion that serves as a rotation axis of the rotating member 5670 described later, and is arranged at a position symmetrical with respect to the vertical line passing through the center of the disk-shaped front base 5612 above the central opening portion 5612h.

The sliding protrusion 5612m is a protrusion that guides the displacement of the rack 5627, which will be described later, and is formed in a columnar shape from the lower side to the back side of the central opening portion 5612h. Further, the pair of sliding protrusions 5612m are arranged at positions symmetrical with respect to the perpendicular line passing through the center of the disk-shaped front base 5612.

The projection plate member 5620 is made of a light-transmitting material, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player, and when the light of the LED 651 is incident, the incident light is used as a pattern or a pattern. It is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 in the form of a pattern. That is, a pattern or a symbol can be highlighted (displayed) on the front surface of the third symbol display device 81.

The projection plate member 5620 includes a rack 5627 extending in the left-right direction at a lower end portion, and a reflection portion 622 formed inside the projection plate member 5620. The rack 5627 is arranged below the opening at the center of the base member 610 (center opening 5612h of the front base 5612), and is arranged at a position invisible from the front side of the projected unit 5600 in the assembled state. Further, the rack 5627 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, and its longitudinal dimension is set longer than the dimension in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 72) of the projection plate member 5620. As a result, the movable range of the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620 can be made larger than the horizontal dimension of the projection plate member 5620.

In the rack 5627, a rack gear 5627a meshed with the gear 5668 is engraved on the lower surface thereof, and a sliding groove 5627b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the central portion thereof.

The rack gear 5627a is a gear tooth surface that displaces the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) in the left-right direction when the driving force of the drive motor 661 is transmitted via a gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668). There is, and it is formed in the entire area on the lower surface side of the rack 5627.

The sliding groove 5627b is a groove for suppressing the rack 5627 from tilting when the rack 5627 is displaced in the left-right direction by the drive of the drive motor 661. A pair of sliding protrusions 5612m of the base 5612 are inserted. As a result, when the rack 5627 is displaced with respect to the rear base 5611, the displacement direction is restricted and the rack 5627 is slid and displaced. The detailed operation of the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) will be described later.

Above the back side of the projection plate member 5620, a columnar rod member 5625 extending in the left-right direction (FIG. 72 left-right direction) and a horizontally long rectangle facing the projection plate member 5620 across the rod member 5625. A front cover 5626 having a shape is arranged.

The rod member 5625 is formed to be longer in the left-right direction than the length dimension in the left-right direction of the projection plate member 5620 and shorter than the outer diameter of the back base 5611, and the front cover 5626 and the projection plate member 5620 are formed. It is sandwiched between them and arranged on the projection plate member 5620.

The front cover 5626 is a plate member guided by the rod member 5625, and the length dimension in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 72) is set to be substantially the same as the length dimension in the left-right direction of the projection plate member 5620. The rod member 5625 is sandwiched between the member 5620 and the projection plate member 5620.

The front cover 5626 is provided with a groove portion 5626a recessed in the front side (back side of the paper surface of FIG. 72) and recessed in the left-right direction on the side surface facing the projection plate member 5620. The groove portion 5626a is a groove in which the rod member 5625 is arranged inside, and is recessed in a substantially U-shaped cross section, and the recessed dimension in the vertical direction and the front side is set to be larger than the outer diameter dimension of the rod member 5625. Will be done.

Thereby, the rod member 5625 can be arranged inside the groove portion 5626a. Thereby, the projection plate member 5620 can be disposed with respect to the rod member 5625 so as to be slidably displaceable in the axial direction of the rod member 5625.

Further, the rod member 5625 is arranged on the back side of the front cover 5626 with respect to the front side surface. That is, since the rod member 5625 can be arranged so as not to protrude from the front surface of the front cover 5626, the front cover 5626 can be arranged on the projection plate member 5620 without forming a recessed portion on the projection plate member 5620.

Here, when the rod member 5625 protrudes from the front surface of the front cover 5626, it is necessary to form a groove for inserting the rod member 5625 on the back surface side of the projection plate member 5620. However, the projection plate member 5620 is a member that emits light incident inside the projection plate member 5620 from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620 in the form of a pattern or a pattern, and forms a groove in the projection plate member 5620. When the thickness dimension is partially reduced, the light incident on the inside of the projection plate member 5620 becomes difficult to travel and the amount of light emitted from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620 decreases as the thickness dimension is reduced. There was a problem.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the projection plate member 5620 can be arranged on the front cover 5626 in the state where the rod member 5625 is arranged inside without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 5620. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light incident on the inside of the projection plate member 5620 from becoming difficult to travel, and to suppress the decrease in the amount of light emitted from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620.

Further, as described above, both ends of the rod member 5625 are arranged so as not to fall off from the front base 5612, so that the projection plate member 5620 can slide in the axial direction of the rod member 5625 with respect to the front base 5612. Be retained. That is, the projection plate member 5620 is suspended and arranged on the rod member 5625 so as to be slidably displaceable in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 72).

Therefore, when a driving force is applied to the drive motor 661, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 5627 via a gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668), and the rack 5627 is slid and displaced in the left-right direction. .. When the rack 5627 is slid and displaced in the left-right direction, the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 can be displaced in the slide direction.

In the irradiation unit 650, the first block 653 is arranged substantially linearly along the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620, and the LED 651 arranged in front of the first block is arranged with the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620. It is placed at the opposite position. As a result, the light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 can be incident on the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620 to make the pattern or pattern of the reflection portion 622 of the projection plate member 5620 stand out.

Further, on the side surface of the front base 5612 on which the first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is arranged, a bulging portion 5612n that bulges in a substantially rectangular shape in the rear view is formed on the back side (front side of the paper in FIG. 71). The bulging portion 5612n is a portion for raising the first block 653 toward the back surface side, and the raising dimension thereof is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the rotating member 5670 described later. Thereby, the rotating member 5670 described later can be arranged in the gap between the second block 654 and the front base 6512.

Further, a protrusion 612g is formed on the bulging portion 5612n. The first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is arranged in the irradiation unit 5600 by inserting a protrusion 612 g into the insertion hole 653b1 and sandwiching it between the front base 5612 and the back base 5611.

A rotating member 5670 is attached to the front side of the second block 654 arranged at both ends of the irradiation unit 650.

The rotating member 5670 is a plate member that is bent and formed in an L-shape in a front view, is arranged on the front base 5612 with the bent portion located on the center side in the left-right direction, and is an irradiation unit on one side on the longitudinal side. The second block 654 of 650 is attached. Further, a through hole 5671 penetrated in the front-rear direction is formed in the bent portion of the rotating member 5670.

The through hole 5671 is an opening into which the shaft portion 5612k of the front base 5612 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 5612k. Therefore, when the rotating member 5670 is arranged on the front base 5612, the rotating member 5670 can rotate about the shaft portion 5612k with respect to the front base 5612.

Here, since the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the rotating member 5670, the irradiation unit 650 can be displaced when the rotating member 5670 is rotated with respect to the front base 5612. That is, by displacing the rotating member 5670, the base member 652 of the irradiation unit 650 can be bent to displace the second block 654 with respect to the first block 653.

The rotating member 5670 is urged by an urging spring (not shown) interposed between the rotating member 5670 and the front base 5612 in a direction in which the tip portion on one side is displaced downward with respect to the shaft portion 5612k. It is arranged in 5612. Further, a displacement regulating projection 5612j projecting to the back surface side is formed on the lower side of the shaft portion 5612k of the front base 5612 on which the rotating member 5670 is arranged.

The displacement regulating protrusion 5612j is a member that regulates the downward displacement of one end side of the rotating member 5670, and the protruding tip thereof is rearward (on the rear base 5611 side) of the rotating member 5670 in a state where the protruding tip is arranged on the front base 5612. It is positioned and formed on the front side (front base 5612 side) of the irradiation unit 650 attached to the rotating member 5670. As a result, the downward displacement of the rotating member 5670 on the one end side is regulated by the displacement regulating projection 5612j of the rotating member 5670, and the light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 to the projection plate member 5620 side is the displacement regulating projection. It is possible to suppress the interruption by 5612j.

Next, the operation of the projection unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 76. 73 (a) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 73 (b) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state. 74 (a) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 74 (b) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state.

75 (a) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 75 (b) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the third state. FIG. 76 (a) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 76 (b) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state. Note that FIGS. 74 and 76 show a state in which the back base 5611 is removed. Further, since the displacement operation from the first state to the third state is only the displacement operation from the first state to the second state and the displacement direction reversed left and right, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 73 (a) and 74 (a), in the first state in which the projection plate member 5620 is arranged at the substantially central portion on the left and right sides of the central opening portion 5612h, the rotations arranged on both sides in the left-right direction. The member 5670 is urged by an urging spring (not shown) so that one end side is displaced downward. As a result, the second block 654 of the irradiation unit 650 arranged on the rotating member 5670 can be displaced with respect to the first block 653, and the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged on the front surface of the second block 654 can be changed. It can be tilted toward the projection plate member 5620. As a result, the light of the LED 651 arranged on the front surface of the second block 654 can be incident from the left and right sides (left and right sides of FIG. 74 (a)) of the projection plate member 5620, and the light of the LED 651 can be incidented by that amount. The amount of light emitted from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased, and the pattern or pattern of the projection plate member 5620 can be clearly displayed.

From the state shown in FIGS. 73 (a) and 74 (a), a driving force is applied to the drive motor 661, and the driving force is applied to the rack 5627 via a gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668). When the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is also slid and displaced to the right in the front view (see FIG. 73 (b) and FIG. 74 (b)). ). As a result, a second state is formed in which the projection plate member 5620 is arranged on the right side of the front view with respect to the central opening portion 5612h.

In this case, the front cover 5626 arranged on the front side of the upper end portion of the projection plate member 5620 is in contact with the side surface on the other end side of the L-shaped front view of the rotating member 5670 arranged in the slide direction. As a result, a rotational moment in the direction of pushing up one end side upward can be applied to the rotating member 5670 around the axis of the shaft portion 5612k which is the axis of rotation. Therefore, since one end side of the rotating member 5670 is pushed upward, the second block 654 arranged on the rotating member 5670 is also displaced with respect to the first block 653 in the longitudinal direction of the first block 653 (FIG. 74). (B) Left-right direction) and the longitudinal direction of the second block 654 are displaced to positions on substantially the same straight line.

As a result, with the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 can be displaced to increase the amount of light incident from the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620. can. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased, and the pattern or pattern of the projection plate member 5620 can be clearly displayed.

Further, since the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 can be displaced according to the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the amount of light emitted from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620 can be measured. Can be changed. That is, the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 can be changed. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to have an interest.

Here, when the projection plate member is displaced, the displacement is such that the light amount of the projection plate member is kept constant by lighting the LED arranged at another position according to the displacement. Along with this, it is necessary to control whether the LED is turned on or off, and the more complicated the displacement of the projection plate member, the more complicated the LED control becomes, and there is a problem that the reliability of the product is lowered. Further, there is a problem that the product cost increases because the LED is arranged at another position.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, since the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can be displaced according to the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the position of the projection plate member 5620 is detected and arranged at another position. Since it is not necessary to control the LED to be turned on or off, the control of the LED 651 can be simplified, the reliability of the product can be improved, and the product cost can be suppressed from increasing.

Further, in order to irradiate the displaced irradiated object (projection plate member) with light, if a plurality of fixed irradiated objects (LEDs) are arranged around the irradiated object, the irradiation range of each irradiated object is There is a problem that a part with a weak amount of light is formed between the two, and when the irradiated body is displaced, light and darkness is created, which lowers the interest of the player. Here, it is conceivable to solve the above-mentioned problem by narrowing the arrangement interval of the irradiating bodies, but in this case, the problem is that the product cost increases because the number of irradiating bodies to be arranged increases. There was a point.

However, in the fifth embodiment, since the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can be displaced with the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can be made to follow the displacement operation of the projection plate member 5620. Therefore, the projection plate member 5620 can always be stably projected regardless of its displacement position. As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of light and darkness due to the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, and to prevent the player's interest from being impaired. Further, since it is not necessary to increase the number of LEDs 651 arranged, it is possible to suppress an increase in product cost.

Further, as described above, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 can be changed by the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, so that the driving force of the drive motor 661 can be applied to the projection plate member 5620. It can be used for both the drive for sliding displacement and the drive for rotating the second block 654, and it is not necessary to newly provide a drive means for displacementing the second block 654. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cost of the product from increasing.

Further, since the irradiation unit 650 is formed by the base member 652 formed of an elastically deformable material and the blocks 653 and 654, it is not necessary to form the displaceable second block 654 as a separate member. Therefore, since the irradiation unit 650 assembled as a unit can be arranged on the front base by connecting the wiring after arranging the irradiation unit 650 on the front base 5612, the process at the time of assembling can be simplified.

On the other hand, when the second state is displaced to the first state, the rack 5627 is displaced to the center position in the left-right direction of the central opening portion 5612h by reversing the drive of the drive motor 661. Therefore, the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is also slid and displaced in the same manner to form the first state.

In this case, the rotating member 5670 on the side (left side in FIG. 74 (b)) whose one end is pushed up by the displacement to the second state is a projection plate by an urging spring (not shown) interposed between the rotating member 5670 and the front base 5612. As the member 5620 slides and displaces to the center position in the left-right direction, one end side of the front view L-shape of the rotating member 5670 is pushed downward and rotated around the shaft portion 5612k. Further, as described above, the rotating member 5670 that is displaced downward is brought into contact with the displacement regulating projection 5612j, so that the rotation range thereof is restricted.

As described above, the displacement from the first state to the third state shown in FIGS. 7 and 8 is detailed because the displacement operation from the first state to the second state and the displacement direction are simply reversed left and right. The explanation is omitted. The third state is a state in which the projection plate member 5620 is arranged on the left side of the front view with respect to the central opening portion 5612h (see FIGS. 75 (b) and 76 (b)).

Next, the projection unit 6600 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80. In the first embodiment, the case where the entire central portion of the projection plate member 620 is always visible to the player has been described, but in the sixth embodiment, the projection plate member 6620 is partially visible to the player. Arranged as possible.

First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 77 is a front view of the projection unit 6600 according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 78 is a front exploded perspective view of the projection unit 6600. FIG. 79 is a rear view of the front base 6612 in a state where the front base 6612 and the irradiation unit 650 are assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the projection unit 6600 is a projection plate member that is partially visibly arranged from a base member 6610 formed in a front view annular shape and an opening formed in the base member 6610. The 6620, the irradiation unit 650 for incident light from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 6620, the drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 6620, and the driving force of the drive motor 661 are transmitted to the projection plate member 6620. It is mainly provided with a gear train (gears 662 to 664) for the purpose.

The base member 6610 includes a ring-shaped back base 611 and an annular front base 6612 arranged in front of the back base 611, and is formed on the facing space between the back base 611 and the front base 6612. The projection plate member 6620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (662 to 664) are housed in the internal space.

The front base 6612 has an opening in which a front view annular-shaped shielding member 6612r is formed on the inner edge of the annular-shaped front base 612 of the first embodiment, and a part of the shielding member 6612r opens in a fan shape in the front-rear direction. The portion 6612p is formed.

The opening 6612p is an opening for making the projection plate member 6620 arranged on the back surface visible from the opening, and is formed in a fan shape centered on the axis of the front base 6612 formed in an annular shape in the front view. It is formed with a length of about 1/6 of the entire circumference of the shielding member 6612r, and is formed on the right side when viewed from the front.

The irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the back surface of the front base 6612 in the area between the intermediate standing portion 612b and the outer standing portion 612c at the outer edge of the opening 6612p, and the back base 611 is mounted on the back surface of the front base 612. By superimposing the front surfaces of the two bases, they are accommodated between the facing surfaces (internal space) of both bases 611 and 612.

The projection plate member 6620 is formed in a front view annular shape, and its inner diameter is formed to be larger than the inner diameter of the annular front base 6612. Further, the projection plate member 6620 is arranged coaxially with the axis of the front base 6612. Therefore, in the assembled state of the projection unit 6600, the inner edge portion of the projection plate member 6620 is arranged so as not to be visible to the player.

Further, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 arranged on the projection plate member 6620 are arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612 (shielding member 612r)). Since it is provided), it can be difficult for the player to see it, and it is possible to prevent the appearance from being deteriorated by that amount.

The projection plate member 6620 is made of a light-transmitting material, transmits the display of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface side, and is visible to the player through the opening 6612p of the front base 6612. When the light emitted from the irradiation unit 650 is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in the form of a pattern or a pattern to form a front base 6612. It is made visible to the player through the opening 6612p of. That is, a pattern or a pattern can be made to appear (display) in the internal space of the opening 6612p of the front base 6612.

Further, the projection plate member 6620 includes a reflecting portion 6622 that diffusely reflects light inside the projection plate member 6620. The reflection portion 6622 is a portion whose inside is roughened by laser processing or the like, and a plurality of patterns, patterns, etc. are formed in the circumferential direction of the projection plate member 6620 over the entire area of the projection plate member 6620 in the front view. To. In this embodiment, the shape of the pattern or pattern of the reflective portion 6622 is formed by dividing it into six in the circumferential direction, and the reflection areas 6622a to 6622f of the six forms of the pattern or pattern are formed (see FIG. 80). ..

Further, in the projection plate member 6620, a gear member 630 and a groove forming member 640 are arranged on the outer peripheral edge portion on the back surface side and the front surface side, respectively. As a result, as in the first embodiment, the driving force of the drive motor 661 is transmitted to the gear member 630 via the gear train (662 to 664), so that the projection plate member 6620 can be rotated.

Next, the operation of the projection unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIG. 80. 80 (a) to 80 (c) are rear views of the projection unit 6600. It should be noted that FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (c) show the transition state of the projection plate member 6620. Further, in FIG. 80, a state in which the back surface base 611 is removed is shown. Further, the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 and the reflection portion 6622 (reflection regions 6622a to 6622f) of the projection plate member 6620 are shown by chain lines.

As shown in FIG. 80A, when the projection plate member 6620 is arranged at the initial position, the projection plate member 6620 is inside the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 in the front view (viewing from the back of the paper to the front). The reflection region 6622a is arranged. Therefore, when the light of the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 is incident from the outer edge portion of the projection plate member 6620, the pattern or pattern of the reflection region 6622a can be displayed inside the opening 6612p. That is, the player can visually recognize the patterns and patterns that emerge inside the opening 6612p.

In this case, the light of the LED 651 is also irradiated to the reflection regions 6622b and 6622f adjacent to the reflection region 6622a, but since the front base 6612 is arranged in front of the reflection regions 6622b and 6622f, the player reflects the light. The display of the areas 6622b and 6622f cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, by displaying the pattern or pattern of the projection plate member 6620 through the opening 6612p, the player does not see the display other than the display surface, and the other areas can be seen, which impairs the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 80 (b) and 80 (c), when a driving force is applied to the drive motor 661, the driving force is projected via the gear train (gears 662 to 664) as described above. The projection plate member 6620 is rotated by being transmitted to the plate member. By rotating the projection plate member 6620, the patterns and patterns of the reflection regions 6622a to 6622f arranged inside the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 in the front view are switched. This makes it possible to display a plurality of different patterns or patterns inside the opening 6612p.

Here, if a pattern or a pattern is printed on the front surface of the irradiated body (projection plate member 6620) to displace the irradiated body and switch the display surface thereof, the visible region (opening portion) of the irradiated body is switched. From 6612p), the pattern or pattern switching of the irradiated body can be seen, and the player can know which display will be displayed next before the pattern or pattern switching is completed, so that the player can see the switching of the irradiated body. There was a problem that the displacement could not be enjoyed to the end.

Further, even if the power of the light source (LED651) that irradiates the irradiated object with light is turned off to darken the display surface of the irradiated object, the irradiated object is affected by the light of another device or a fluorescent lamp in the store. By being irradiated, the pattern and pattern of the irradiated body could be visually recognized by the player.

In the present application, the projection plate member 6620 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and by turning off the light of the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650, the pattern or pattern of the projection plate member 6620 is made difficult to see and becomes transparent. be able to. Therefore, by turning off the irradiation of the LED 651 when rotating the projection plate member 6620, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the pattern or pattern switching of the projection plate member 6620. The displacement of 6620 can be enjoyed to the end.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, since the projection plate member 6620 is formed in an annular shape in the front view and is rotated around the center thereof, the projection plate member 6620 is slide-displaced as compared with the case where the projection plate member 6620 is slide-displaced. The space required for arranging the projection plate member 6620 can be suppressed while ensuring the number of patterns and patterns to be visually recognized by the player through the opening 6612p of the 6612.

That is, if the projection plate member 6620 is slidably displaced, the arrangement space in the left-right or vertical direction is limited, so that it is difficult to secure the pattern and the number of the projection plate member 6620 on the drawing side. By forming the projection plate member 6620, the space required for arranging the projection plate member 6620 can be suppressed while securing the number of patterns and patterns.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining a part or all of one embodiment with a part or all of another one or a plurality of other embodiments.

In the first and second embodiments, the case where a total of four first block 653 and second block 654 are arranged on the substrate member 652 in the irradiation unit 650 of the projection unit 600 has been described, but it is not always the case. The total number of the first block 653 and the second block 654 may be 3 or less, and may be 5 or more. In this case, the ratio of the first block 653 and the second block 654 is arbitrary, and may be only the first block 653 or only the second block 654.

In the first and second embodiments, the case where the LED 651 is arranged on the front surface of the substrate member 652 and the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back surface is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the LED 651, the first block 653, and the second block 654 may be arranged in front of the substrate member 652. In this case, the LED 651 is housed inside the first block 653 and the second block 654, and the light emitted from the LED 651 is projected from the opening formed in the front of the first block 653 and the second block 654. It is incident on the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620.

In the first and second embodiments, the case where the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 of the projection unit 600 are formed of a light transmissive material has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gear member is not necessarily limited to this. The 630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640 may be formed of two layers of a light transmitting material and a non-transmitting material.

For example, the back surface portion 632 side of the gear member 630 and the front surface portion 642 side of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are formed of a layer of a non-transparent material, and the projection plate members 620 and 2620 sides of the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are formed. It may be formed of a layer of permeable material. In this case, the layer of the non-transparent material can prevent the light emitted by other devices in the gaming region from incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620. That is, the light emitted by a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by a layer of a non-transparent material.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when light is not incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and the pattern or pattern is not displayed on the front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620), the pattern or pattern is not displayed from another device. It is possible to prevent light from being incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and displaying a pattern or a pattern on the front surface of the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

Further, in this case, the layer formed of the non-permeable material is formed of a highly reflective metal material or a flexible material, or is between the layer of the non-permeable material and the layer of the transparent material. It is preferable to interpose a metallic material or a flexible material having a high reflectance. As a result, the light incident on the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 from the LED 651 can be more easily reflected on the projection plate members 620 and 2620. As a result, the light reflected by the reflecting unit 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 can be strengthened, and the pattern or pattern can be clearly highlighted.

In the first and second embodiments, the case where the back surface portion 632 of the gear member 630 of the projection unit 600 and the front surface portion 642 of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are in contact with air (atmosphere) has been described, but this is not always the case. For example, a seal of a member having a higher reflectance than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 (for example, silver leaf or aluminum) is attached to the rear view 632 and the front portion 642, or a color having a high reflectance is attached. Printing (for example, white color) may be performed.

In this case, the sticker or printing can prevent the light emitted by other devices in the game area from incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620. That is, the light emitted by a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by a sticker or printing.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when light is not incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and the pattern or pattern is not displayed on the front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620), the pattern or pattern is not displayed from another device. It is possible to prevent light from being incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and displaying a pattern or a pattern on the front surface of the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

Further, by sealing or printing, the light incident on the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640, 2640 from the LED 651 can be more easily reflected on the projection plate members 620, 2620. As a result, the light reflected by the reflecting unit 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 can be strengthened, and the pattern or pattern can be clearly highlighted.

When a seal is attached, the seal may be attached so as to protrude toward the outer edge side from the back surface portion 632 of the gear member 630 and the front surface portion 642 of the groove forming members 640 and 2640. In this case, since the light emitted from the LED 651 and spreading in a fan shape can be reflected by the protruding seal portion, the light emitted from the LED 651 can be easily focused on the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

In the third embodiment, the case where an air layer is formed between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, a plate member made of a non-transparent material having a higher reflectance than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 is provided between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620. It may be installed.

In this case, the light incident on the projection plate member 3620 is surely totally reflected by the plate member made of a non-transmissive material having high reflectance, and can be advanced from the edge portion of the projection plate member 3620 toward the center side. can. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the intensity (light amount) of the light irradiated to the irradiation angle α3, and to strengthen the light reflected by the reflecting unit 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 3620. Patterns and patterns can be clearly highlighted.

Further, the plate member made of a non-transmissive material having high reflectance can suppress the light emitted by other devices in the game region from being incident on the projection plate member 3620. That is, the light emitted by a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by a plate member made of a non-transmissive material having high reflectance.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when the light is not incident on the projection plate member 3620 and the pattern or pattern is not displayed on the front of the projection plate member 3620), the light from other devices is emitted from the projection plate. It is possible to prevent the pattern or pattern from being displayed on the front surface of the projection plate member 3620 by being incident on the member 3620.

In the first embodiment, the case where the means for urging the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 is a coil spring has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a rubber-like elastic body, a torsion spring, or the like. It may be a leaf spring. As the mounting method, a mode in which the protrusion 852 and the protrusion 823 are connected and mounted, or a mode in which the protrusion 850 is mounted between the rotation shaft of the displacement member 850 and the shaft support portion 821 of the base member 820 is exemplified.

In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 is rotationally moved around the shaft hole 851 formed at one end is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the displacement member. The 850 may be a slide displacement of the guide groove formed in the front base 820. In this case, if both ends of the guide groove of the front base 820 are formed at different positions in the vertical direction (gravity direction), the displacement member 850 is displaced in the gravity direction as in the first embodiment. Since it can be a normal projection motion of a constant velocity circular motion and the displacement velocity can be changed, it is possible to make the displacement member 850 perform an interesting displacement.

In the first to third and sixth embodiments, the case where the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged at a position facing the side end surface of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be arranged at a position facing the side end surfaces of the gear members 630, 3630 or the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640.

Also in this case, similarly to the first to third, fifth and sixth embodiments, the light of the LED 651 is incident from the side end faces of the gear members 630, 3630 or the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640, and the projection plate is projected. A pattern or pattern can be displayed on the surface of the members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620.

Further, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is not opposed to the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 (that is, the light irradiation of the LED 651). One of the light emitted by the LED 651 by arranging the surface on the projection plate member 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear member 630, 3630 and the side end surface of the groove forming member 640, 2640, 3640). The portions may be arranged so as to be incident on the side end faces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640.

In this case, the light emitted in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is irradiated obliquely from the irradiation surface of the LED 651 while irradiating another non-irradiation member different from the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620. A part of the light can be incident on the side end faces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640. That is, the LED 651 can be made to use both the light for displaying a pattern or a pattern on the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 and the light for irradiating another irradiated object.

In the first to third, fifth and sixth embodiments described above, the case where the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 and the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620 and 6620 are arranged in parallel has been described. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be tilted with respect to the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620.

Specifically, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged toward the back surface side, and the light emitted in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 at the arrangement position of the LED 651 is the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620. , 6620 may be a position to be irradiated on the side end face. In this case, when a pattern or a pattern is displayed on the surface of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the light of the LED 651 leaks from the inner edge of the front base 612, 6612 formed in the front view annular shape. Can be suppressed.

Further, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged toward the front side, and the light emitted in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 at the arrangement position of the LED 651 is the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620. It may be a position where the side end surface is irradiated.

Further, the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged so as to be tilted with respect to the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 toward the back side or the front side, and the arrangement position of the LED 651 is set to the LED 651. The position may be such that the light emitted in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the groove forming member 640, 2640, 3640 is irradiated to the side end surface of the groove forming member 640, 2640, 3640 or the side end surface of the gear member 630, 3630.

In addition, the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged so as to be tilted with respect to the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 toward the back side or the front side, and the arrangement position of the LED 651 is arranged. The light emitted in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be the position where the front portion 632 of the groove forming member 640, 2640, 3640 or the back portion 632 of the gear member 630, 3630 is irradiated.

In the fifth embodiment, the light emitted from the LED 651 arranged on the front surface of the second block 654 is incident on the projection plate member 5620 from the left and right side surfaces of the projection plate member 5620 from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620. The case of increasing the amount of emitted light has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 by the light incident from the left and right sides of the projection plate member 5620 can be displayed on the projection plate member. The pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 may be different from the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 due to the light incident from the upper end surface of the 5620.

That is, the upper end of the projection plate member 5620 is formed by forming an air layer or a non-light-transmitting material inside the projection plate member 5620 and dividing the region of the reflection portion 622 (for example, dividing into three regions). The light incident from the portion is emitted from the front side by the reflection portion 622 in the first region, and the light incident from the left side surface is emitted from the front side by the reflection portion 622 in the second region, and is emitted from the right side surface. The incident light can be in a state of being emitted from the front side by the reflecting portion 622 in the third region. As a result, it is possible to form a plurality of patterns and patterns of patterns displayed on the projection plate member 5620, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

In this case, a plurality of light sources (LED651) for irradiating the first to third regions are provided around the irradiated body (projection plate member 5620), and the first to third regions are irradiated (for example, on the upper portion). The arranged light source incidents light from the upper end to irradiate the first region, the light source arranged on the left side incidents from the left end surface and irradiates the second region, and the light source arranged on the right side illuminates the right end. Although it is possible to irradiate the third region by injecting light from a surface), there is a problem that a plurality of light sources need to be arranged and the product cost increases.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 is rotated with respect to the first block 653 due to the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, so that the second block Since the irradiation direction of the light of the LED 651 arranged in front can be changed, it is possible to irradiate two areas, one is to irradiate the second or third region and the other is to irradiate the first region. Therefore, the number of LEDs 651 to be arranged can be reduced by that amount, and it is possible to suppress an increase in product cost.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the irradiation direction of the light of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 is changed according to the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the rotating member 5670 may be connected to the shaft portion of the newly disposed drive motor and rotated.

In this case, since the rotating member 5670 can be rotated regardless of the slide position of the projection plate member 5620 to change the irradiation direction of the light of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654, the projection plate member 5620 can be changed. The amount of light emitted from the front of the can be partially increased or decreased. That is, the direction of the light incident on the projection plate member 5620 can be displaced to change the shade of the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620.

In the first embodiment, a projection plate member 620, a plurality of irradiation units 650 that irradiate the projection plate member 620, and a gear that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 661 are provided between the facing surfaces of the front base 612 and the rear base 611. The case where the rows (gears 662 to 664) are arranged as one unit has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned unit (projection) is provided between the facing surfaces of the front base 612 and the rear base 611. The plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear trains (gears 662 to 664) may be arranged in such a manner that two or more are stacked in the front-rear direction.

In this case, by displaying the pattern or pattern on each projection plate member 620, the player can visually recognize the display of the pattern or pattern on each projection plate member 620 in combination. As a result, by changing the rotation position of each projection plate member 620, it is possible to form a plurality of patterns and display patterns of the patterns, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest from being impaired.

In the first embodiment, the case where the projection plate member 620 is rotationally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the projection plate member 620 may be fixed and the irradiation unit 650 may be displaced. ..

In the third embodiment, the case where the light of the LED 651 is not incident on the center side from the side end portion of the projection plate member 3620 at the position where the bolt T is arranged has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the bolt T may be formed of a metal material (for example, iron or stainless steel) and the light projected on the side surface thereof may be reflected to the center side of the projection plate member 3620. In this case, the light emitted from the LED 651 can be easily collected in the central portion of the projection plate member 3620.

Further, a plurality of bolts T are arranged at regular intervals, and a portion where a pattern or a pattern is not displayed (the light of the LED 651 is not incident) is partially formed on the surface of the projection plate member 3620 to form a portion of the projection plate member 3620. The display may be separated.

Further, as described above, since the ground contact surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is a surface that radially overlaps the opening 646 (see FIG. 65 (c)), it is usually used. A place where light is not incident can be a ground plane.

That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646, when light is incident from the radial outside of the opening 646, the light is blocked by the bolt T and the light of the LED 651 is not incident on the reflecting portion 622 side. Therefore, it is possible to reliably suppress that the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from the LED 651 is incident on the projection plate member 3620 side.

In this case, by displacing the irradiation unit 650 while irradiating the light of the LED 651 arranged on the irradiation unit 650, the player can visually recognize that the projection plate member 620 is displaced (rotated). ..

The displacement of the irradiation unit 650 in this case may be a slide displacement or a rotational displacement, and the irradiation directions of the LEDs 651 arranged in the first block 653 and the second block 654 are displaced in different directions. It may be a thing.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple hits (for example, two or three times) including it occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Concept of the invention using the projection plate member 620 of the projection unit 600 as an example>
It is provided with a light transmitting member formed from a light transmitting material in a plate shape and having a reflecting portion, and a light irradiating means for irradiating the side end surface of the light transmitting member with light, and is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. In a gaming machine in which the light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member, the ratio of the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member to the light emitted from the light irradiating means is high. The gaming machine A1 is provided with an emission increasing means for increasing emission, and the emission increasing means is arranged outside the display area.

Here, a light transmitting member formed from a light transmitting material in a plate shape and having a reflecting portion, and a light irradiating means for irradiating the side end surface of the light transmitting member with light are provided from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. A gaming machine is known in which incident light is reflected by a reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of a light transmitting member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-29735). According to this type of gaming machine, for example, by disposing a light transmitting member on the front side of the liquid crystal display device in the game area, the player can display the liquid crystal display device via the light transmitting member in a normal state. On the other hand, when a predetermined gaming state is formed, the light emitted from the light irradiating means is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, and the light traveling inside the light transmitting member is reflected by the reflecting portion. Then, it is emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, a plurality of groups composed of a plurality of reflecting surfaces are arranged in the reflecting portion, and each group forms a pattern or a pattern. Therefore, the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be recognized by the player as a pattern or a pattern. That is, along with the display of the liquid crystal display device, a pattern or a pattern can be made to appear (display) on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device.

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member is weak. Therefore, it becomes difficult to clearly show (display) a pattern or a pattern. In this case, if the output of the light irradiation means is increased, not only the cost and power consumption are increased, but also the amount of heat generated is increased, which causes a problem that heat affects other members and devices.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the emission increasing means for increasing the ratio of the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member to the light emitted from the light irradiating means is provided, the light reflected by the reflecting portion is provided. The light emitted from the front of the transmissive member can be strengthened. As a result, patterns and patterns can be clearly highlighted (displayed). Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the calorific value can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and devices can be suppressed. Further, since the emission increasing means is arranged outside the display area, it can be difficult for the player to see it, and it is possible to suppress deterioration of the appearance by that amount.

The position of forming the reflective portion of the light transmitting member may be, for example, the back surface of the light transmitting member or the inside of the light transmitting member.

In the gaming machine A1, the emission increasing means includes an outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A2, since the emission increasing means includes an outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light emitting means irradiates the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Not only the light that reaches directly but also the light that is emitted from the light irradiating means and reflected by the outer edge member can be incidented from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, and the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member by that amount can be incident. The light collection efficiency can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the light that reaches the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member among the light emitted from the light irradiating means, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened. , Patterns and patterns can be clearly highlighted (displayed). Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the calorific value can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and devices can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, when the emission increasing means includes the outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, the other device in the game area emits light. Can prevent the outer edge member from blocking the light of the other device and incident light from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiating means is turned off (when the light is not incident on the light transmitting member and the pattern or pattern is not displayed on the front of the light transmitting member), the light from another device is incident on the light transmitting member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pattern or pattern from being displayed on the front of the light transmitting member.

In the gaming machine A2, the gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the outer edge member is arranged on each of the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2, the outer edge members are arranged on the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, respectively. The light that is not directly incident on the side end surface and that deviates to the front side of the light transmitting member and the light that deviates to the back side are reflected by the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, respectively, and incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. be able to. Therefore, the light collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be further improved by that amount.

Further, by providing the outer edge member on each of the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member in this way, even if the light emitted by another device in the gaming area arrives from either the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member. Since it can be blocked by each of the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, it is possible to suppress the incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiating means is turned off (when the light is not incident on the light transmitting member and the pattern or pattern is not displayed on the front of the light transmitting member), the light from another device is incident on the light transmitting member. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably suppress the display of patterns and patterns on the front surface of the light transmitting member.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the outer edge member is arranged so as to project outward from the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2 or A3, the outer edge member is arranged so as to project outward from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, so that the light emitted from the light irradiating means can be emitted. , It is possible to reflect the light at the overhanging portion of the outer edge member (the surface connected to the side end surface of the light transmitting member) so that the light can be easily incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the light collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be further improved by that amount.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the outer edge member is formed of a material having a refractive index smaller than that of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A5, in any of the effects of the game machines A2 to A4, the outer edge member is formed of a material having a refractive index smaller than that of the light transmitting member, and thus is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Light can be easily reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reached to the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened to make the pattern or pattern clear. It can be highlighted (displayed).

That is, for example, when the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are formed of a material having the same refractive index, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is less likely to be reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. It is easily transmitted to the outer edge member. The light transmitted to the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) on the outer surface (boundary with air) of the outer edge portion and then returned to the light transmitting member, but the light returned from the outer edge member to the light transmitting member. Includes not only those traveling in the direction toward the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member but also those traveling in the direction toward the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the light that reaches the reflecting portion is reduced. On the other hand, like the game machine A4, by forming the outer edge member from a material having a refractive index smaller than that of the light transmitting member, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be collected from the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. Since it can be easily reflected (or can be totally reflected) at the boundary with and, it is possible to secure the light that reaches the reflecting portion.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the outer edge member is arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A6, in the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A5, the outer edge member is arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member. Light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reflected by the front surface or the back surface (boundary with air) of the light transmitting member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reached to the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened to make the pattern or pattern clear. It can be highlighted (displayed).

That is, for example, when the refractive index of the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are the same or the difference in the refractive index is relatively small, if the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are in close contact with each other, the side end surface of the light transmitting member The incident light is less likely to be reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member, and is easily transmitted to the outer edge member. The light transmitted to the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) on the outer surface (boundary with air) of the outer edge portion and then returned to the light transmitting member, but the light returned from the outer edge member to the light transmitting member. Includes not only those traveling in the direction toward the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member but also those traveling in the direction toward the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the light that reaches the reflecting portion is reduced. On the other hand, like the game machine A5, by arranging the outer edge member in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Since the light can be easily reflected (or can be totally reflected) on the front surface or the back surface (boundary with air) of the light transmitting member, the light reaching the reflecting portion can be secured.

In any of the game machines A2 to A6, a rotation mechanism for rotatably supporting the light transmitting member and applying a rotational driving force to the light transmitting member is provided, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. , A curved rack gear is engraved along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the annular shape, and the rotation mechanism rotationally drives a pinion gear meshed with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member and the pinion gear. A game machine A7 characterized by being provided with a driving means.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape and along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the annular shape. A curved rack gear is engraved, and the rotation mechanism includes a pinion gear meshed with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member and a drive means for rotationally driving the pinion gear. The rotation of the pinion gear can be transmitted to the outer edge member via the curved rack gear, whereby the light transmitting member can be rotated together with the outer edge member. Therefore, the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be visually recognized by the player in a displaced (rotated) state.

In this case, the outer edge member has both the role of condensing the light emitted from the light irradiating means on the side end surface of the light transmitting member and the role of transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the light transmitting member to rotate the light. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts by that amount, reduce the product cost, and improve the reliability due to the simplification of the structure.

In any of the game machines A2 to A7, the light transmitting member is rotatably supported and a rotation mechanism for applying a rotational driving force to the light transmitting member is provided, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that a guide groove is recessed along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface of the annular shape, and the rotation mechanism includes a plurality of support rings guided along the guide groove.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A7, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape, and the guide groove is formed along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface of the annular shape. Since the rotating mechanism is recessed and includes a plurality of support rings guided along the guide groove, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is exposed by the action of the guide groove and the support ring, that is, light. The light transmitting member can be rotatably supported in a state where light can be incident from the side end surface of the transmitting member. Therefore, by rotating the light transmitting member, the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be visually recognized by the player in a displaced (rotated) state.

In this case, the outer edge member can have both the role of condensing the light emitted from the light irradiating means on the side end surface of the light transmitting member and the role of rotatably supporting the light transmitting member together with the support ring. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, the product cost can be reduced, and the reliability can be improved by simplifying the structure.

The support ring may be rotatably pivotally supported, or may be non-rotatably fixed. In this case, as the form in which the support ring is guided along the guide groove, the support ring rotatably supported by the shaft rolls along the guide groove or rolls while sliding, or becomes non-rotatable. An example is a mode in which a fixed support ring slides along a guide groove.

Further, in the gaming machine A8 which is subordinate to the gaming machine A7, the outer edge member in which the curved rack gear is engraved is on either the front or the back surface of the light transmitting member, and the outer edge member in which the guide groove is recessed is the light transmitting member. It is preferable to dispose of them on the other side of the front surface or the back surface, respectively. That is, by disposing the outer edge member on the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light radiated from the light irradiating means is not directly incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member, and the front surface of the light transmitting member. This is because the light that deviates to the side and the light that deviates to the back side can be reflected by the outer edge member on the front surface and the outer edge member on the back surface, respectively, and incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Further, by disposing the outer edge member on the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member in this way, the light emitted by the other device in the game area reaches from either the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member. Even in this case, it can be blocked by each of the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, and it is possible to suppress the incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

In the gaming machine A8, the outer peripheral side of the outer edge member is formed so as to face the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member at a predetermined interval, and the facing space between the outer edge member and the light transmitting member is the guide. A gaming machine A9 characterized by being a groove.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A8, the outer peripheral side thereof is formed in a shape in which the outer peripheral side thereof faces the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member at a predetermined interval, and the outer edge member and the light transmitting member are formed. Since the space opposite to the guide groove is used as a guide groove, it is possible to reduce the size of the structure composed of the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. That is, by supporting one inner wall of the guide groove on the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, it is not necessary to form the outer edge member in a U-shaped cross section, and the thickness dimension of the outer edge member can be reduced. Therefore, the size of the above-mentioned structure can be reduced accordingly.

Further, since the outer edge member is arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is directed to the front surface of the light transmitting member. Alternatively, it can be easily reflected on the back surface (boundary with air). As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reached to the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened to make the pattern or pattern clear. It can be highlighted (displayed).

In any of the game machines A2 to A9, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is formed orthogonal to the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiating means has a direction of irradiating light from the irradiating surface. The gaming machine A10 is characterized in that the irradiation surface is arranged so as to face the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a posture orthogonal to the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A9, the side end faces of the light transmitting member are formed orthogonal to the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiating means thereof irradiates the light transmitting member. Since the irradiation surface is arranged so as to face the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a posture in which the irradiation direction of light from the surface is orthogonal to the side end surface of the light transmitting member, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is irradiated from the light irradiation means. The light incident from the light can be easily reflected by the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reached to the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened to make the pattern or pattern clear. It can be highlighted (displayed).

<Concept of the invention using the irradiation unit 650 of the projection unit 600 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a target member to be irradiated with light and a plurality of light emitting means dispersedly arranged around the target member in a posture in which each of the target members faces an irradiation surface, the plurality of light emitting means. It is provided with one or a plurality of substrate members on which at least two or more of the light emitting means are mounted and elastically deformable, and a base member that holds the substrate member in a predetermined elastically deformed posture. Characteristic gaming machine B1.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a target member to be irradiated with light and a plurality of light emitting means arranged in such a posture that each of the target members faces an irradiation surface (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015). -29735 (publication). According to this gaming machine, by irradiating light from a light emitting means and incident light from the outer peripheral surface of the target member, the incident light is advanced inside the light transmitting member and reflected by a reflecting portion. It can be emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, the applicant of the present application forms the target member in a disk shape from a light transmissive material and forms a reflective portion, while irradiating a plurality of light emitting means on the outer peripheral surface of the disk shape (target member). We devised a structure in which the light emitted from each light emitting means is incident from the outer peripheral surface of the target member (not known at the time of filing the present application).

However, it has been newly found that in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since it is necessary to dispose a plurality of light emitting means around the target member, there is a problem that the disposition work is troublesome. In particular, since it is necessary to dispose of the plurality of light emitting means in a posture in which each irradiation surface is directed toward the outer peripheral surface of the target member (that is, each has a different direction), the disposition work is troublesome from this point as well. ..

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, at least two or more light emitting means are mounted and one or a plurality of substrate members formed so as to be elastically deformable, and the substrate members are held in a predetermined elastically deformed posture. By disposing one substrate member on the base member, it is possible to complete the disposing work of at least two or more light emitting means. Therefore, the labor of arranging the light emitting means can be reduced accordingly.

Further, when the substrate member is arranged on the base member, the substrate member is held in a predetermined elastically deformed posture, so that the direction of the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be defined. That is, since it is not necessary to dispose of the plurality of light emitting means in a posture in which their irradiation surfaces are individually directed toward the outer peripheral surface of the target member, the labor of disposing the light emitting means can be suppressed from this point as well.

The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that the gaming machine B1 is provided with a block body which is formed to have higher rigidity than the board member and is arranged on the board member, and the block body is held by the base member.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the block body is formed to have higher rigidity than the board member and is provided on the board member, and the block body is held by the base member. , It is possible to suppress warpage and bending of the substrate member and easily define the posture of the substrate member. As a result, the posture of the light emitting means can be suppressed from being affected by the warp or bending of the substrate member, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be easily maintained.

In the gaming machine B2, the gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the light emitting means is arranged in a region of the substrate member where the block body is arranged.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the light emitting means is arranged in the region where the block body is arranged in the substrate member, so that the posture of the light emitting means is the warp of the substrate member. It is possible to more reliably suppress the influence of bending and bending. Therefore, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the direction can be further easily maintained.

In the gaming machines B2 or B3, a plurality of the block bodies are arranged on the substrate members at predetermined intervals, and the base members are elastically deformed from the substrate members located between the block bodies. A gaming machine B4 characterized by being held by the body.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2 or B3, a plurality of block bodies are arranged on the board members at predetermined intervals, and the board members located between the block bodies are elastically arranged. Since it is held by the base body in a deformed (bent) posture, the posture of the light emitting means (direction of the irradiation surface) is stabilized as compared with the case where the substrate member in the elastically deformed posture is directly held by the base member. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the light emitting means is arranged in front of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is the substrate member on the opposite side to the target member. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being arranged on the back surface.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the light emitting means is arranged in front of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is on the opposite side of the target member. Since it is arranged on the back surface of the substrate member, the light emitting means can be brought closer to the target member while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture of the substrate member by the block body.

In the gaming machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by screws from the front surface of the board member, and the head of the screw is projected to the front surface of the board member.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by screws from the front surface of the substrate member, and the head of the screw protrudes from the front surface of the substrate member, so that the light emitting means can be used. It can be protected by the head of the screw. That is, for example, when the movable member is displaced to the front surface of the substrate member, the head of the screw is brought into contact with the member, and it is possible to prevent the member from being in contact with the light emitting means and being damaged.

In the gaming machine B6, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is arranged between the heads of the two screws.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is arranged between the heads of the two screws. The light emitting means can be easily protected by the head of the screw.

It is preferable that the two screws are arranged along the displacement direction of the movable member. This is because by disposing the light emitting means between the heads of the screws arranged in this way, it is possible to easily bring the movable member into contact with the head of the screw, and it is possible to easily protect the light emitting means.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B7, a protrusion is projected from one of the base body or the block body, and a fitting hole for receiving and fitting the protrusion is formed on the other side of the base body or the block body. A gaming machine B8 characterized by being recessed in.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of either the game machines B2 to B7, a protrusion is projected on one of the base body and the block body, and the protrusion is received and fitted to the one of the base body and the block body. Since the hole is recessed in the other side of the base body or the block body, the block body can be arranged in the base body by fitting the protrusion into the fitting hole, and the labor of the arrangement work can be suppressed. .. In particular, when a plurality of block bodies are arranged on a substrate member and are arranged in an elastically deformed (bent) posture between the block bodies, one of the block bodies is positioned (temporarily fixed) by fitting. ), The substrate member can be elastically deformed (bent) and the other block body can be fitted, so that the workability of the arrangement work can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B8, the block body has a recess on the surface on the side where the board member is disposed, and the electronic component disposed on the substrate member is housed in the recess of the block body. A gaming machine B9 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine B9, in any of the gaming machines B2 to B8, the block body is provided with a recess on the surface on the side where the block body is disposed, and is disposed on the substrate member in the recess of the block body. Since the electronic parts are stored, the electronic parts can be covered and protected by the block body. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent a movable member from coming into contact with an electronic component and being damaged.

<Concept of the invention using the vertical displacement unit 800 as an example>
A game including a base member, a displacement member disposed on the base member and displaceably formed between the first position and the second position, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace it. In the machine, the displacement member includes an elastic member that is elastically deformed as it is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member moves from the first position to the second position by the action of gravity. In a state of being disposed on the base member in a form of being displaced in the direction and the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position. A gaming machine C1 characterized in that the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced.

Here, the base member, the displacement member disposed on the base member and displaceably formed between the first position and the second position, and the driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace it. A gaming machine is known to provide an effect by displacement of a displacement member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is placed in a retracted position (for example, either the first position or the second position) which is invisible to the player or is on the outer edge side of the game area, while a predetermined game. When the state is formed, the displacement member is displaced toward the overhanging position (the other of the first position or the second position) overhanging the game area, and the movement of the displacement member displaced toward the overhanging position is played. The production is performed so that the person can see it. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed, so that it is difficult to make the displacement member perform an interesting displacement. There was a problem that there was.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the displacement member is provided with an elastic member that is elastically deformed as the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member is the first from the first position due to the action of gravity. It is arranged on the base member in a form of being displaced in the direction toward the two positions, and in a state where the driving force is released from the driving means to the displacement member, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position. Since the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member around this equilibrium position (predetermined position). ) Can be performed by the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the displacement member in the gravity direction can be regarded as the normal projection motion of the constant velocity circular motion, and the displacement velocity can be changed, so that the displacement member can be displaced in an interesting manner.

On the other hand, if a driving force is applied from the driving means to the displacement member, the displacement member is displaced between the first position and the second position in a manner different from the above-mentioned displacement (movement of normal projection of constant velocity circular motion). It is possible to increase the variation of displacement accordingly. That is, the variation of displacement can be increased only by switching whether or not the driving force is applied from the driving means to the displacement member, and the structure and control do not need to be complicated, so that the product cost can be reduced and the reliability can be improved. It can be improved.

In the gaming machine C1, the displacement member is characterized in that one end side is rotatably supported by the base member and the other end side is moved up and down between the first position and the second position. Game machine C2.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, one end side is rotatably supported by the base member, and the other end side is moved up and down between the first position and the second position. , When the displacement member is made to perform reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member by releasing the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member. The displacement of the other end of the displacement member can be a displacement that combines not only a linear motion in the vertical direction but also a rotational motion centered on one end side. As a result, it is possible to make such a displacement member perform an interesting displacement.

The gaming machine C2 includes a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and the transmitting means is a rotating member rotatably arranged on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means. The gaming machine C3 is characterized by comprising a connecting member having one end rotatably connected to a position eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member and the other end rotatably connected to the displacement member.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2, the transmission means are rotatably arranged on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the eccentricity from the rotation center of the rotating member. Since one end is connected to the displaced position and the other end is connected to the displacement member, the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released, and the action of gravity and the elastic recovery of the elastic member are provided. When reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) due to force is performed on the displacement member, the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member, and the pushing and pulling causes the rotating member to rotate. Since the posture of the connecting member is changed, the magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member among the forces in the push-pull direction can be changed. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocally displaced, the magnitude of the resistance that the displacement member receives from the transmission means can be changed, and as a result, the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member can be changed. It is possible to make such a displacement member perform an interesting displacement.

In the game machine C3, at the predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, with respect to the direction connecting the rotation center of the rotating member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the directions connecting the connecting positions of the rotating member and the connecting member and the connecting positions of the connecting member and the displacement member are substantially orthogonal to each other.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C3, at a predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the rotation center of the rotating member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member are connected. Since the direction connecting the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member is substantially orthogonal to the direction connecting the and, the direction of rotating the rotating member among the forces in the push-pull direction. The magnitude of the force component can be maximized at the equilibrium position (predetermined position), and the force component can be reduced in any direction of pushing or pulling from the equilibrium position. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocally displaced, the resistance received by the displacement member from the transmission means can be changed substantially symmetrically with respect to the equilibrium position, so that the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member can be easily continued.

In the gaming machine C3 or C4, one of the rotating member or the connecting member includes a projecting portion projecting toward the other, and the predetermined position in the movable range between the first position and the second position. When the displacement member is displaced in the central range including the above, the projecting portion is made non-opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, and the first position or the second position is smaller than the central range. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that when the displacement member is displaced in an outer range close to the above, the projecting portion faces the other of the rotating member or the connecting member so as to be abuttable.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3 or C4, one of the rotating or connecting members comprises a protruding portion that projects towards the other and is between the first and second positions. When the displacement member is displaced in the central side range including the predetermined position in the movable range of the above, the projecting portion is made non-opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, and the first position or the first position from the central side range or When the displacement member is displaced in the outer range close to the second position, the projecting portion faces the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, so that the driving force applied from the driving means to the displacement member is released. , When the displacement member is made to perform reciprocating displacement centered on the equilibrium position (predetermined position), the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member is smoothed by avoiding the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the projecting portion in the central range. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the projecting portion is made to face the other of the rotating member or the connecting member so as to be abuttable in the outer range, and the displacement members are rotated. It is possible to suppress rattling between the member and the connecting member.

In the gaming machine C5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the center side range, and the center side range is set to a range including the predetermined position and the second position. A gaming machine C6 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the central side range, and the central side range includes a predetermined position and a second position. Since it is set in the range, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the posture of the displacement member can be changed by suppressing the rattling between the rotating member and the connecting member by using the projecting portion. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position by the driving force of the driving means, it is possible to avoid the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the projecting portion, which acts on the displacement member. It is possible to smoothly displace the displacement member while also utilizing gravity.

For example, when the first position is the retracted position where the displacement member is retracted to the outer edge side of the game area, and the second position is the overhang position where the displacement member projects toward the center side of the game area. At the first position (retracted position), rattling of the displacement member can be suppressed to improve the appearance and durability, and the effect of other members can be suppressed from being hindered, and the displacement member can be suppressed. Is displaced from the first position to the second position (overhanging position), it can be quickly extended (displaced) to the second position, and the effect of the overhanging operation can be enhanced. ..

In the gaming machine C6, at the second position, the rotation center of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are located substantially in a straight line. The gaming machine C7.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of the game machine C6, at the second position, the rotation center of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are substantially straight. Since it is located on the line, even if the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member, the pushing and pulling direction is toward the center of rotation of the rotating member, and the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member is generated. A state that does not occur (that is, a dead point) can be formed. Therefore, when the displacement member is displaced toward the second position, the second displacement member can be smoothly (quickly) displaced while avoiding the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the projecting portion. After being placed at the position, the action of the dead center described above suppresses the rattling of the displacement member, and the appearance and durability can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines C3 to C7, the connecting member includes a contact portion formed so as to be able to contact the base member, and the contact portion is the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member and the rotation. It is characterized in that it is arranged on a substantially straight line connecting the connecting positions of the member and the connecting member, and is arranged on the side opposite to the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member with the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member interposed therebetween. Game machine C8.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C3 to C7, the connecting member includes a contact portion formed so as to be able to contact the base member, and the contact portion is a displacement member and a base. Since it is on a substantially straight line connecting the connecting position of the member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and is arranged on the opposite side of the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member across the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member. , When the displacement member rattles with respect to the base member, the contact portion of the connecting member is brought into contact with the base member, so that the connecting portion of the rotating member and the connecting member (one end of the rotating member and the connecting member can rotate). It is possible to easily suppress the inclination of the rotating shaft) with respect to the shaft support hole of the portion connected to. As a result, the driving force of the driving means can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member via the transmitting means.

<Concept of the invention using the displacement unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a base member, a displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member, and a drive means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, the drive means are the first drive means and the first drive means. Two driving means are provided, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the second driving means. The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced in a different manner.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a base member, a displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, and performing an effect by displacement of the displacement member. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is placed in a retracted position that is invisible to the player or is on the outer edge side of the game area, while when a predetermined game state is formed, the displacement member is stretched over the game area. The displacement member is displaced toward the protruding position, and the player is made to visually recognize the operation of the displacement member displaced toward the overhanging position.

However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that the effect of the effect due to the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient. Specifically, in the conventional gaming machine, the displacement mode (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one, so the effect of the displacement of the displacement member is one pattern. Therefore, it was difficult to produce a surprising effect for the player. Even if the driving force of the driving means is changed by varying the strength, the displacement speed of the displacement member only increases or decreases, and the displacement mode (trajectory) is still constant. It was difficult to do.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the driving means includes a first driving means and a second driving means, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means. (2) Since the displacement member is displaced in a different manner depending on the case where the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the drive means, the effect of the effect of the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced. That is, unlike the conventional product in which the displacement mode of the displacement member (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited in one way, the effect is not one pattern, and at least two displacement members are used. Since the displacement can be performed according to the displacement mode, the player can perform a surprising effect by switching the displacement mode.

In the gaming machine D1, a first member that is slidably displaceable on the base member and is driven by the first drive means, and a second drive means that is slidably displaceable on the base member. The gaming machine D2 is provided with a second member driven by the displacement member, and the first portion and the second portion of the displacement member are connected to the first member and the second member at least rotatably, respectively. ..

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the first member is displaceably displaced on the base member and is slidably displaceable on the base member and the first member driven by the first driving means. The first and second portions of the displacement member are at least rotatably connected to the first and second members, respectively, with a second member driven by the second drive means. When the first member is slidably displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, it is possible to form a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side, while the second member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means. When the member is slidably displaced, it is possible to form a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the first portion side. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two displacement modes, it is possible to perform a surprising effect of the player by switching the displacement mode.

In particular, according to the game machine D2, the two displacement modes are not formed by making the center of rotation the same and different the direction of rotation, but forming the center of rotation differently and the center of rotation differently. Therefore, the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be made large, and the player can easily perform a surprising effect.

In the gaming machine D2, the first member and the second member are disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a connecting pin protruding from the first portion of the displacement member or one of the first members is provided. A gaming machine D3 characterized in that it is rotatably and slidably inserted into a guide groove formed on the other side.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2, the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and one of the first part or the first member of the displacement member. Since the connecting pin projecting from is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guide groove formed on the other side, the first member is linearly displaced by the driving force of the first driving means or the driving force of the second driving means. A displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side and a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the first portion side are formed depending on whether the second member is linearly displaced. can. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two displacement modes, it is possible to perform a surprising effect of the player by switching the displacement mode.

In this case, since the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, it is not necessary to have a complicated structure as in the case of sliding displacement with a curved locus (with a curved locus). If there is, it is necessary to provide not only a mechanism for guiding the first member and the second member in a curved shape but also a mechanism for continuously applying a driving force to the first member and the second member that are displaced in a curved shape. (Given), for example, a rack pinion mechanism can be utilized and its structure can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the durability and the reliability of operation.

In the gaming machine D3, the gaming machine D4 is characterized in that the direction of the linear displacement of the first member and the direction of the linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel to each other.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of the game machine D3, the direction of the linear displacement of the first member and the direction of the linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel to each other. In addition to the displacement mode in which only one of the driving means is driven to rotate the entire displacement member, the displacement in which both the first driving means and the second driving means are driven to linearly displace (for example, traverse) the entire displacement member. Aspects can be formed. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least three different displacement modes, it is possible to easily perform a surprising effect of the player by switching such displacement modes.

In particular, according to the game machine D4, as the displacement mode of the displacement member, the type of displacement (rotation) is the same, but the type of displacement itself is different in addition to the one that makes the direction of rotation different from the position of the center of rotation. (That is, rotation and linear displacement can be formed), so that the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be further increased, and it is possible to further facilitate the surprising effect of the player.

In the gaming machine D4, when the first member and the second member are driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, respectively, the displacement speed of the first member and the displacement speed of the second member are different. A gaming machine D5 characterized by being speed.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D4, when the first member and the second member are driven by the first drive means and the second drive means, respectively, the displacement speed of the first member and the second member. Since the displacement velocity is different from the displacement velocity of the member, the displacement of the displacement member can include the rotational motion and the linear motion. That is, the displacement member can be not only displaced (linear motion) in parallel with the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the second member while maintaining its posture, but can also be linearly moved while rotating its posture. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to perform a surprising effect.

It should be noted that it is impossible to displace the displacement member in a displacement mode that combines such rotational motion and linear motion with the conventional configuration in which the displacement member is slid along the slide groove by the driving force of one driving means. , It is possible for the first time to use the driving means of 2 as in the present invention.

In any of the game machines D1 to D5, a second displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member is provided, and when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, the displacement thereof. The second displacement member is displaced together with the member, while the second displacement member is maintained in a stopped state when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means. Amusement machine D6.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D5, a second displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member is provided, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first driving means. When the displacement member is displaced, the second displacement member is displaced together with the displacement member, while when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means, the second displacement member is maintained in the stopped state. , The device (change) between the displacement mode by the first drive means and the displacement mode by the second drive means can be increased. Therefore, by switching such a displacement mode, it is possible to easily perform a surprising effect of the player.

<Concept of the invention using the projection unit 5600 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a target member to be irradiated with light and a light irradiating means for irradiating the target member with light, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiating means is formed displaceably. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the irradiation mode of the target member by the light irradiation means is changed by the displacement of one or both of the above.

Here, a game in which a displacement member displaceably formed between the first position and the second position and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace the displacement member are provided, and the effect is produced by the displacement of the displacement member. The machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this gaming machine, a light irradiation means (LED) is arranged inside the displacement member, and a translucent portion made of a light transmissive material is provided on the front surface (the surface on the player side) of the displacement member, and the translucency thereof is provided. By irradiating the light portion from the back surface with the light irradiating means, the player can visually recognize the form in which a part of the displacement member (translucent portion) is emitting light. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the irradiation mode of the target member is constant by the light irradiation means, there is a problem that there is little change in the mode visually recognized by the player, and it is difficult to have a hobby.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiation means are formed so as to be displaceable, and the displacement of one or both changes the irradiation mode of the target member by the light irradiation means. It is possible to change the mode in which the player visually recognizes. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to have an interest.

As the form in which the light irradiation mode is changed, for example, the position of the target member irradiated by the light irradiation means is changed, and the distance from the irradiation surface of the light irradiation means to the irradiation position of the target member is changed. The form to be used, the form in which these are combined, and the like are exemplified.

The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the gaming machine E1 includes a base member, the light irradiation means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is displaceably arranged on the base member.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the light irradiating means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is displaceably arranged on the base member. The target wiring can be fixed, and the occurrence of disconnection can be suppressed accordingly.

In the game machine E2, a shielding member having an opening and being arranged on the base member is provided, and a part of the target member is made visible to the player from the opening of the shielding member, and the target member is illuminated by light. Formed from a transmissive material in a plate shape and provided with a reflecting portion, the light emitted from the light irradiating means and incident from the side end surface is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the target member. A game machine E3 featuring.

Here, in the reflecting portion, a plurality of groups composed of a plurality of reflecting surfaces are arranged, and each group forms a pattern or a pattern. Therefore, the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be recognized by the player as a pattern or a pattern.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, a shielding member having an opening and arranged on the base member is provided, and a part of the target member is visually recognized by the player from the opening of the shielding member. By displacing the target member, different parts of the target member can be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member.

For example, a first position in which the first group of the plurality of groups constituting the reflective portion is visible through the opening and a second group different from the first group are the openings. When the target member is displaceable from the second position which becomes visible via While making the player visually recognize the first pattern or pattern to be formed, by displacing the target member from the first position to the second position, the pattern or pattern to be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member can be obtained. , Can be changed to a second pattern or pattern formed by the second group.

In this case, since the target member is formed of a light-transmitting material, when the target member is displaced in order to change the pattern or pattern visually recognized by the player, the light from the light irradiation means is not irradiated. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the target member is displaced.

In the gaming machine E3, the target member is formed in a circular shape or an annular shape in front view, and is rotatably arranged on the base member with the center of the circular shape or the annular shape as a rotation center. Game machine E4 to play.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E3, the target member is formed in a circular shape or an annular shape in front view, and can rotate to the base member with the center of the circular shape or the annular shape as the center of rotation. Since it is arranged in, the target member is arranged while ensuring the number of patterns and patterns to be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member, as compared with the case where the target member can be slidably displaced. Space required for can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine E2, the target member is formed of a light-transmitting material in the shape of a circular plate in front view and has a reflecting portion, and receives light emitted from the light irradiating means and incident from the side end surface. A plurality of light irradiation means are distributed and arranged around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface is directed toward the side end surface of the target member. The gaming machine E5, wherein the target member is rotatably arranged on the base member with the center of the circular shape as the center of rotation.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of the game machine E6, the target member is formed of a light-transmitting material into a circular plate shape and has a reflecting portion, and is irradiated from the light irradiation means and from the side end surface. The incident light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the target member, and a plurality of light irradiation means are distributed around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface is directed to the side end surface of the target member. Therefore, by rotating the target member while irradiating light from the light irradiation means, the player can visually recognize the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front of the target member in a rotated state. can.

In the gaming machine E5, the plurality of light irradiating means are distributed and arranged in the circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the rotation center of the target member.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effect of the game machine E5, the plurality of light irradiation means are distributed and arranged in the circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the rotation center of the target member, so that the rotation position of the target member ( Regardless of the phase), the light emitted from the front surface of the target member can be easily kept constant. That is, it is possible to stably form a pattern or a pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front surface of the target member.

A gaming machine E7 comprising a base member, wherein the light irradiation means and the target member are displaceably arranged on the base member.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the light irradiation means and the target member are displaceably arranged on the base member. It is possible to increase the variation of the change of the irradiation mode. Therefore, it is possible to further change the mode in which the player visually recognizes, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to have an interest.

The gaming machine E7 includes a driving means for applying a driving force to the target member to displace it, and the light irradiation means is brought into contact with the target member displaced by the driving force applied from the driving means. The gaming machine E8 is characterized in that it is displaced together with the target member.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E7, a driving means for applying a driving force to the target member to displace it is provided, and the light irradiation means is a target displaced by the driving force applied from the driving means. When the members are in contact with each other, they are displaced together with the target member, so that the drive means for displacing the target member can also be used, and it is not necessary to separately provide a drive means for displacing the light irradiation means. can.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B9, C1 to C8, D1 to D6, and E1 to E8, the gaming machine K1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine K2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B9, C1 to C8, D1 to D6, and E1 to E8. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B9, C1 to C8, D1 to D6, and E1 to E8, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Machine K3. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine provided with a target member to be irradiated with light and a plurality of light emitting means arranged in such a posture that each of the target member faces an irradiation surface (a game machine). For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-29735).
However, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that it takes a lot of time and effort to arrange the light emitting means.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the labor of arranging the light emitting means.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machines of the technical idea 1 are a plurality of target members to be irradiated with light and a plurality of game machines distributed around the target members in a posture in which the irradiation surface is directed to the target members. The light emitting means is provided, and one or a plurality of substrate members formed to be elastically deformable together with at least two or more light emitting means among the plurality of light emitting means, and the substrate member are elastically formed. It is provided with a base member that is held in a deformed predetermined posture.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 includes a block body formed in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 having higher rigidity than the substrate member and arranged on the substrate member, and the block body is the base. It is held by the member.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, in which the light emitting means is arranged in a region of the substrate member where the block body is arranged.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the labor of arranging the light emitting means can be suppressed.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be directed in an appropriate direction.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be directed in an appropriate direction.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
410 Base member 420L Left displacement member (displacement member)
420R Right displacement member (displacement member)
422 connecting hole (first part or second part)
423 Sliding groove (first part or second part, guide groove)
440 bogie member (first member or second member)
481 First drive motor (first drive means or second drive means)
485 protruding member (displacement member, second displacement member)
488L lower left rack (1st member or 2nd member)
488R Lower right rack (1st member or 2nd member)
488b Drive pin (connecting pin)
491 Second drive motor (first drive means or second drive means)
610, 5610, 6610 Base member 611, 5611, 6612 Back base (base member)
612,5612 Front base (base member)
612g holding pin (protrusion)
6612p Opening 6612r Shielding member 620, 2620, 3620, 5620, 6620 Projection plate member (target member, light transmitting member)
622,6622 Reflecting parts 630,3630 Gear member (outer edge member, emission increasing means)
631 Tooth part (curved rack gear)
640, 2640, 3640 Groove forming member (outer edge member, emission increasing means)
641,2641 Guide groove 651 LED (light emitting means, light irradiation means)
652 Board member 653 1st block (block body)
653b1 Insertion hole (fitting hole)
654 2nd block (block body)
654b1 Insertion hole (fitting hole)
661 Drive motor (drive means)
820 Front base (part of base member)
830 Back base (part of base member)
850 Displacement member 863 Transmission gear (rotating member)
863c Protruding part 870 Connecting member 880 Drive motor (driving means)
SP urging spring (elastic member)
S1, S2 screw C collar (support ring)
θ1 1st drive range (outer range)
θ2 2nd drive range (center range)

Claims (3)

In a gaming machine provided with a target member to be irradiated with light and a plurality of light emitting means dispersedly arranged around the target member in a posture in which each of the target members faces an irradiation surface.
One or a plurality of substrate members on which at least two or more light emitting means among the plurality of light emitting means are mounted and elastically deformable.
A gaming machine characterized by including a base member that holds the substrate member in a predetermined posture elastically deformed. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a block body that is formed to have higher rigidity than the board member and is arranged on the board member, and the block body is held by the base member. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the light emitting means is arranged in a region of the substrate member where the block body is arranged.

Images